Nokia E51 User Manual
E51 User Guide
DECLARATION O F CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION d eclares tha t this RM-244 product is in compliance with the es sential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 199 9/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/decla ration_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproducti on, transfer, d istributi on, or storage of p art or all of the content s in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, No kia Origin al Enhancements logos, Eseries, E51, and Visual Radio are t radem arks or registered trademarks of Noki a Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of N okia Corporation. Other product and company n ames mentio ned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their respective ow ners. This product is li censed under the MP EG-4 V isual Patent Portfo lio License (i) for personal and no ncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) fo r use in connect ion with MPEG- 4 video prov ided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for an y other use . Additi onal informatio n, including that related to promotional, interna l, and commercial uses, may be ob tained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla. com. This product includes so ftware licensed fr om Symbian So ftware Ltd é 1998-200 7. Symb ian and Symb ian OS are trademar ks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 97-2007. Tegic Com munications, Inc. Al l righ ts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are tr ademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. Portions of th e Nokia Maps software are co pyright é 1996-2002 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make cha nges and improvemen ts to any of the product s describ ed in th is document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EXT ENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, UN DER NO CI RCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONS IBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOM E OR ANY SPECIA L, INC IDENTA L, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRECT DA MAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THI S DOCU MENT A RE PROVIDE D "AS IS". E XCEPT A S REQ UIRED B Y APP LICABL E LAW, N O WARR ANTI ES OF AN Y KIND, E ITHER E XP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T H E IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY A ND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MA D E IN RELA TION TO TH E ACCU RACY, RELIA BILIT Y OR CON TE NTS OF T HIS DO CUMEN T. NOKI A RESE RVES THE RI GHT TO R EVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITH DRAW IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTIC E.
The availability of particular products an d applications for these pro ducts ma y vary by region. Pleas e check with y our Nokia de aler f or details, an d availab ility of language o ptions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, techn ology or software subject to export laws and regu lations from the US and other countr ies. Di versi on contrary to law is prohibited. Model number: E51-1
Contents For yo ur s afe ty .. ......... ......... ......... .......... ...10 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................11 Enh ance me nts , bat ter ies , an d ch arg ers .....................12 Get st ar ted ........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ..13 Insert the SIM card and battery................. ............ ......13 Charge the battery..................................... ...................14 Keys and parts................................................... ............15 Connect the headset............................................ .........16 Attach the wrist strap...................................................16 First start-up................................................................. .16 Lock the keys.......................................... .......................1 7 Display indicators. .............................. ...........................17 Nok ia s uppo rt a nd cont act in form ati on.. .......... ......... 19 Your Nokia E51........................ ...................20 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........20 Settings wizard...................... ........... ............ ............ ....20 Standby modes............ ......................... ......................... 21 Active standby......................... ................ ...................2 1 Standby...................... ................ ................ .................21 Menu................ ............................... ...................... ..........22 Com mon a cti ons in s eve ral ap pli ca tion s...... .......... ....22 Transfer................................................. .........................23 Transfer content between devices......... ..... ..... ...... ..23 View transfer log........................................................24 Synchronise, retrieve, and send data............ ...........2 4 Personalisation.. ................. ................. ........... ...............24 Profiles........... ............... ............ ................ ............... ....24 Select ringing ton es.................. ............... ............... ...25 Customise profiles............................... .......................25 Change the di splay theme.........................................25 Download a theme.................... ....................... ..........26 Change audio themes.................................... ............26 3-D ringing tones............. .......... ......... ............ ......... ..26 Volume control................................................... ...........27 One-touch keys.................. .......................... ..................27 Home key................... ................ ................ .................2 7 Contacts key............................ ....................................27 Calendar key........ ................ ................ ................ ........28 E-mail key............ ............................. ........................... 28 Multitasking............. ................................................ ......28 Memory........................................ ........................ ..........28 Free memory................. .................... ..................... .....28 Memory card...............................................................29 MicroSD.....................................................................29 Insert the memory ca rd................. ...................... ...29 Use a memory card........ ...................... ....................29 Eject the memory card....................................... .....30 Write text................................................. ......................30 Traditional text in put............ ................ ............. ........30 Predictive text input................... ............. .......... ........3 1 Cha nge th e wri tin g la ngu ag e....... .......... ....... ......... ..31 Antennas........................................................................31 Further information. .....................................................32 Busi ness c omm unic ati ons ................. ........33 Telephone......................................................................33 Voice calls................. .............................. .....................33 Contents
Answer a call............................................................33 Make a call.............................. ..................................33 Make a conference call............................................34 Fax calls............................... ..................... ................34 Video calls................................................ ...................34 Make a video call............ .......... ......... .......... .......... ..34 Share a video.................. ............ ............... ............ ..35 Rec eiv e a vid eo sh ar ing inv ita tio n........................35 Net calls................................ .......................................35 Create a net call profile.......................................... .36 Con nec t to the net cal l se rvi ce.. .......... ........ ........... 36 Make net calls........ ............... ................ ........... .........37 Net call service sett ings............ ......... ......... ............37 Speed dialling.............................................................37 Call divert......................... ................ ................. ..........37 Call barring................ ............................... ...................38 Bar net ca lls........... ................. ........... ................ ..........38 Send DTMF tones........... .............. ........... .............. ......39 Voice mail............ ...................... ...................... ............39 Voice aid................ ..................... .................... ................39 Voice commands.......................................... .................40 Make a call............ .................... ................ ...................40 Launch an ap plication........ ................. ................... ....40 Change profiles..... ............................................. .........41 Voice command settings............... ......... ........ ......... ..41 Log................................. ...................................... ...........41 Call and data registers....................... .............. ..........41 Monitor all commun ications........... ........... ........ .......41 Call and send messages from Log ............... ..............42 Log settings ......... ................... ............. .............. .........42 Contacts..... ................... ................... .................... ...........42 Copy contacts between SIM and device memory.......................................................................42 Manage contacts. ................ ............ ................. ...........42 Manage contact groups......................... ........... .........43 Add ri ngi ng t one s fo r cont ac ts...... ....... .......... .......... 43 Send business ca rds....................................... ............44 Mana ge r ece ive d b usi nes s car ds. ............................. 44 SIM directory...............................................................44 Calendar............................................ .............................45 Create calendar entries ..............................................45 Create a meeting entry......................................... .....46 To-do entries............... ................ ............ ............ .......46 Calendar views..... ............ .................. .................. .......46 Work in different views............... ........ ....... ........ ....47 Month view..................... ............ ........... ................ ..47 Week view...................... ..........................................47 Day view...................................................................47 To-do view..................... .............. ................ ............47 Calendar settin gs..................... .................... ...............47 Web.................................... .............................. ..............48 Connection security........... ........................ .................48 Browse the web........... ............... ................ ............... .48 Bookmarks............................................................ ......49 Clear the cache.............. .................. .................. ..........49 Feeds and blogs................. .............................. ...........49 End a connection........................................................49 Web settings............................................... ................49 Messaging................ ........... ......... ........... ...50 Messaging folders........................ ............... ............... ...50 Organise messages................................... ................. ...51 Message reader............................ ............ .................... .51 Speech............................................................................51 Edit the voice properties............. ...... ....... ....... ...... ....51 E-mail mess ages............. .......................... .....................52 Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide .............52 Connect to a remote mailbox... ................... ..............53 Contents
Read and reply to e-mail ......... ......... .......... ............. ..53 Write and send e-mail................... .......... ............ ......54 Delete messa ges................. ............................ ............54 Subfolders in your remote e-mail...... ....................... 54 Text messages...............................................................54 Write and send text messages................... ...............54 Sending options for tex t messages ........ ............ ......55 Text messages on the S IM card.................................55 View picture me ssages............................ ..................55 Forward picture messages..................... ............ .......56 Multimedia messages...................................................56 Cre ate an d sen d mu lti med ia m ess age s.............. .....56 Rec eiv e a nd r epl y to m ult im edi a mes sag es......... ...57 Create presentations..... ........................................ .....57 View presentations.............................. ................ ......58 Vie w an d sa ve m ult ime dia att ach me nts.................58 Forward a multimedia messag e............... ................5 8 Send a sound clip.................... ............... .......... ..........5 9 Sending options for mu ltimedia messages.............59 Special messag e types..................................................59 Service messages.. ............... ............... ............... .........59 Send service comman ds.............. ........... .......... .........59 Cell broadcast...................................... ...................... ....60 Messaging s ettings.................... ........... .............. ..........6 0 Text message se ttings..................... ............... ...........60 Multimedia message settin gs........... ......... ......... ......61 E-mail account settings................. ....... .......... ......... ..62 Connection settin gs.............. ................... ................62 User settings........................... .................. ...............62 Retrieval settings........ ................ ..................... ........62 Automatic retrieval se ttings............. ......................63 Service message set tings........ ...... ...... ...... ...... ....... ...63 Cell broadcast settings ................................... ............63 Other settings.............................................................63 Noki a O ffi ce T ool s..... .......... ...... .......... .......6 4 Active notes................................................ ...................64 Create and edit notes....... ............................. .............64 Settings for Active notes. .................... .................... ...64 Search........................ ............................. ....................... .65 Search for information............. ...... ....... .......... ...... ....65 Search results.. ................ ................ ............... .............65 Calculator............................................................. ..........65 File manager....... ................................ ...........................66 Quickoffice......................................... ............................66 Work with files...................... ............... ................... ...66 Nokia Team suite........................... .............. .................6 6 Work with teams...... .................................................. 67 Edit teams.................................................. .................67 Nokia Team Suit e settings....... ................... ...............67 Action bar settings .............................. .......................67 Converter.............. .................. .............. .................. ........68 Convert measu rements............ ...................... ............68 Set bas e c urre ncy and exc han ge rate ............... .......68 Zip manager....... .................. .............. .................. ..........68 PDF reader................ ................... ............... .................... 69 Printing................................................. .........................6 9 Print files.....................................................................69 Printing options................... .......... ......... ............ .......69 Printer settings............... ....................................... .....70 Clock................................ ................... ........................ ....70 Alarm clock................. .............. ....................... ............70 World clock................ .............. .............. .............. .......70 Clock settings................ ..............................................70 Notes.......................................... ....................................71 Write and send not es............... ............................ ......71 Free time............................................. .......72 Camera...................................... ........................... ..........72 Contents
Capture an image.......................................................72 Record a video clip......................................... ............72 Camera settings. ........................................ .................73 Gallery................... ......................... ................ ................73 Wor k wit h me dia fi les a nd fo lde rs. ........ ......... ......... 73 View images.... ............... ........... ............... ............... ....73 Manage image files....................................................74 RealPlayer............................................. ........................ .74 Play video clips and stream links. .............................74 Sen d au dio fil es a nd v ide o cl ips .................... ...........75 Vie w inf orm ati on a bout a me dia cl ip......................75 RealPlayer settings............ ..................................... ....75 Music player..................................................... ..............75 Listen to music................... .............. ........... ........... ....75 Track lists................................ ................... .................76 Music categories.........................................................76 Preset frequency settings ..........................................76 Recorder..................................... ....................................76 Record a sound clip....................................................77 Play a recording........ ................ ...................... ............77 Recorder settings.................... ............. ............. .........77 Instant messag ing............. ................. ............. ............ .77 Define IM settings. ................ ........... ................. ..........78 Start a conversation...................................................78 IM groups.................................... ................. ...............78 Block users.............................................. ....................79 IM application set tings............. .......... ............. ......... .79 Flash player......... ..................... .......................... ............80 Manage flash files. ...................... ...................... ..........80 Visual radio................................................ ....................80 Listen to the radio...... ................................................80 View visual conten t...................................... ..............81 Saved stations. ............... ............... ............ ................ ..81 Visual Radio s ettings............ .................... ..................81 Push to talk. ............................................ .......................81 PTT settings....................... ............ ............ ................ .82 Log in to PTT se rvice................. ............ .................. ...82 Make a PTT call.................. .......... .......... ......... ............82 Created PTT calls. .......................... ..................... .........82 Manage PTT contacts................... ......... ............ ........ .83 Create a PTT channel. .................................................83 Exit PTT.................... ....................................................83 Abo ut G PS a nd s ate ll ite sign al s..... .......... ........... ......... 83 Positioning sett ings.................................... ..................84 Nokia Maps...... ............... .......... ............... ................ .......85 Download maps...... ................. ................. ................. .85 Satellite information. .................................... .............86 Browse maps..................................... ............... ..........86 Find a place.................................................................87 Plan a route...... ................. ................. ................. ........87 Navigation.. ................. .............. ................. .................87 Guides........................ ...................................... ............88 GPS data.........................................................................88 Use GPS data................................. ................ ..............88 Landmarks........................................... ..........................89 Create a landmark......................................................89 Edit landmarks...... ......................... .............................89 Landmark categories........................ ............ ........... ..89 Receive landmarks...................... ........... ............. .......90 Connectivity.......... ....... ........ ......... ........ .....91 Fast downloading ............. ............. ............. ............. .....91 Nokia PC Suite...... ....................... ................... ................91 Data cable............................................. ........................ .91 Infrared......................................................... .................92 Bluetooth.......................................................................92 About Bluetooth.........................................................92 Send and receive data with Bluetooth.....................93 Contents
Pair devices.................................................................94 Security tips................................... ......................... ....95 SIM access profile................................................ ..........95 Wireless LAN.......................................................... ........96 WLAN connections..... ................... ................... ...........96 See WLAN av ailability....... ................ ............... ...........96 WLAN wizard...... .................. ............. .................. ........96 Internet access points................ ....... ........ ........ .......... .97 Set up an intern et access point for packet data (GPRS)................................. .............................. ...........98 Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS).......... ................. ................ ................. ......98 Set up an access p oint for WLAN manually. .............99 Adv anc ed acc ess po int set tin gs f or WLA N...............99 Modem............................................. ........................... .100 Connection manager...................... ........... .......... .......100 View and end active connections...........................100 Search for WLAN.......................................................100 Se c u r i ty a nd da ta ma na ge men t.... ..........1 02 Lock the device........... ......................................... ........102 Memory card security.................. ........... ........... .........102 Fixed dialling...............................................................103 Certificate manager................................. .................. .103 View certificate details................... .................. .......104 Certificate trust settings..........................................104 Security modules........ ............... ................ ..................104 Vie w and e dit sec uri ty modu les...... ........... ............10 5 Back up data...................... ..........................................105 Remote configuration ............ .......... ......... .......... .......105 Application mana ger....................... ................... ........106 Install app lications..... ........................ ..................... .107 Installation set tings................................................. 107 Java security set tings............................................... 107 Activation keys............................................................108 Use activation keys ........ ............ ......... ......... ......... ...108 Data synch ronisation......................... .........................109 Create a synchronisation profile............................. 110 Sel ect ap plica tio ns to synchr onise ........ ................. 110 Synchronisation conne ction settings.....................110 Download!....................... ...................... ................ ......110 Select catalogs, folders, and ite ms.... ............... ......111 Download! se ttings......................................... .........111 Software updates... ............................................ .........111 Settings............................ ................. .......113 General settings.......................................... ................113 Personalisation set tings..........................................113 Display settin g s............. .......... .......... ............. .......113 Standby m ode setting s.........................................114 Tone settings.......................................... ...............114 Language sett ings................................................. 114 Notification light.................................. ................ .114 Date and time sett ings.............. ............ ............ ......115 Enhancement s ettings................................... ..........115 Common enhancement se ttings..........................115 Security setting s.................................. .....................115 Device and SIM card security........................... .....115 Restore original settings............................. ............116 Telephone settings.................................. ...................116 Call settings.. ................. ................. ................. ..........116 Network settings... ........................................... ........117 Connection settings .............................. ......................117 Access points.................. ........... ................. ............. .117 Pac ket dat a (GPR S) set tin gs... ........ ............... ..........11 8 WLAN settings..................... .......... ............. .......... ....118 Advanced WLAN settin gs.........................................118 WLAN security settings............................................119 Contents
WEP security settings.... .................. .........................119 WEP key settings............................................. .........119 802.1x security settings......... ...... ...... ...... ......... ......119 WPA security settings ............... ............. ............. .....120 Wireless LAN plugins...... .............................. ............120 EAP plug-ins...................................... .....................120 Use EAP plug-ins .. ................... .................... ...........120 Se ssi on i nit iat io n pr oto co l (S IP) set tin gs ...... ........1 20 Edit SIP profiles............... ......... ......... .......... .............121 Edit SIP proxy servers............... .............................. ..121 Edit registration servers.......................... ............... .121 Net call setting s.......................... ............................. .122 Configuration settings.............................................122 Restrict packet data.................................... .............122 Application settings .................................................... 122 Shortcuts............................ ......................123 General shortcuts.............. ..........................................123 Glossary.................... .......................... ......125 No kia ori gin al en ha nce ment s.............. ...1 29 Enhancements. ............................................................ 129 Battery...... ............................ ................ ........................129 Tro ublesh ootin g.. ....... ......... .............. ......130 Battery information......................... ........133 Charging and discharging.................................. ........133 Nok ia bat tery authe nti cation guid eline s.... ....... ......134 Authenticate hologra m.......... ........ ....... ............ ......134 What if your batt ery is not authentic?...................134 Car e an d ma int enanc e................ ............. 135 Addi tion al s afe ty i nforma tion................ .13 6 Small children ..................... ......................................... 136 Operating env ironment............ ........................ ..........136 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ............ .....136 Implanted medical devices............. ......... ....... ....... .136 Hearing aids... ....................... ....................................137 Vehicles........................................................................137 Pot entia lly exp losive envir onm ents.........................13 7 Emergency calls............... .................................... ........138 CERT IFICATI ON INFOR MATION (S AR)........... ................1 38 MAN UFA CTURER âÂÂS LIM ITED WARRA NTY......1 40 Warranty period. ........................................................ .140 How to get warr anty se rvi ce......... ................. ...........1 41 What is not covered?..................................................141 Other important notices..... ....................................... .142 Lim itati on o f Nok ia's l iab ility. ................. ................. .143 Statutory obligat ions............................. ..................... 143 Index................................................. .......144 Contents
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fol lowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFE RENCE All wireless dev ices may be su sceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLAST ING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENS IBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product docu mentation . Do not touc h the antenna areas un necessarily. QUALIFIED SE RVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BAT TERIES Use only approved enhancements and batterie s. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPI ES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. 10 For your safety
CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible product s. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in serv ice. Press the end key as many times as needed to c lear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location . Do not end the ca ll until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is ap proved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 18 00, 1900, and UMTS 850 and 2100 networks. Contact your service provide r for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, in cluding copyrights. Copyright protection s may prevent s ome images, music (including rin ging tones), and other conten t from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports int ernet connecti ons and other methods of connectivity . Like computers, your device may be expose d to viruses, malicious m essages an d applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and op en messages, accept conn ectivity requests, download content, and acce pt installations only from trustworthy source s. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly upda ting antiviru s software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this devi ce, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interfer ence or danger. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-sp eed data connection, the device may feel warm. In mo st cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working properly, take i t to the n earest auth orized service facility. The office applications support common features o f Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 ). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may ha ve limitations tha t affect how you can use network 11 For your safety
services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent cha racters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WA P 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these techn ologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always swit ch the dev ice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. T his devi ce is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-5 charger. The battery intended for use wi th this device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any ap proval or warranty, and may be dange rous. For availability of a ppr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. 12 For your safety
Get started Model number: Nokia E51-1. Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E51. Insert the SIM card and battery For availability an d information on usi ng SIM card services, conta ct your SIM ca rd vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. 1. With the back of the device facin g you, press the release button (1) and slide the back cover off ( 2). 2. If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing th e connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing th e top of the devi ce. 4. Insert the ba ttery. Align the contacts of the battery with the correspondin g connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 13 Get started
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolli ng. 3. When the batt ery is fully charged, disconn ect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, cha rge the battery until it has been fully charged according to the battery level indi cator. Tip: If you have old compat ible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the N okia E51 by attaching the CA -44 charger adapter to t he old charger. The adapte r is available as a separate enhancement. 14 Get started 2.
Keys and parts 1 â Earpiece 2 â Power key 3 â Volume up key 4 â Mute key. Press the key to m ute the microphone during a call. 5 â Volume down key 6 â Navi⢠scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. 7 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown abov e it on the display. 8 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end acti ve calls and held calls, and with a long key press, end da ta connections. 9 â Backspace key. Press th e key to delete items. 10 â Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silen t and General profiles. 11 â Press the key for a few seconds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writi n g text, press the key and select More symbols to access special characters. 12 â Call key 13 â Selection key 14 â Infrared port 15 â Voice key. This key is used in the voice commands, Recorder, and Push to talk ap plications. 16 â Notification light and light sensor 17 â Microphone 18 â Headset connector 19 â Wrist strap hole 20 â Mini-USB port 21 â Charger connector 15 Get started
1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â E-mail key 4 â Calendar key Connect the headset Warning: When you use the heads et, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headset to the he adset connector of y our device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap as show n, and tig hten it. First start-up 1. Press and hold the powe r key. 2 . I f t h e d e v i c e a s k s f o r a P I N c o d e o r l o c k code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located a n d the current date and time. To find y our country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country later and the n ew country is located on a different time zone 4. The Welcome application opens. Select from the various options, or select Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the Settings wi zard application and the wizards available in the standby mode. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. 16 Get started
You can also contact your s ervice provider for the correct settings. Y o u c a n s w i t c h t h e d e v i c e o n w i t h n o S I M c a r d i n s e r t e d , in which case the device star ts up in the offline mode, and you cannot use the netw ork-dependent phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the power key. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automatically to prevent the keys from bein g accidentall y pressed. To change the period after wh ich the keypad is locked, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SI M card > Keypad autolock perio d . To lock the keys manually in the standby mode, press the left selection key and * . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key and * . Tip: To lock th e keys in the menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock k eypad . To unlock, press the left selection key and * . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The bar ne xt to the icon indicates the signal strength of th e network at your current location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. 17 Get started
You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active . You have selected the Silent pr ofile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. Data is being tra nsmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. An infrared connection is active. If the indicator blinks, your device is trying to connect to the oth er device, or the connec tion has b een lost. A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n ec tion is available (network service). A GPRS packet data connection is ac tive. A GPRS packet data connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). An EGPRS connection is active. An EGPRS packet data connection is on hold. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e ( n e t w o r k service). A UMTS packet data connection is active. A UMTS packet data connection on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). The icon may vary between regions. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is active. The icon may vary between regions. High-speed downlink pa cket access (HSDPA) is on hold. The icon may va ry between regions. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is acti ve in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device. The connection to a hea dset with Bl uetooth connectivity has been lost. 18 Get started
A hands-free car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing p ush-to-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because th e ringing type setti ng of your device is set to Beep on ce or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call . In this m ode, you cannot make PTT calls. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia-asia. com/E51/support or your local Nokia website for the latest gui d es, additiona l information, downloads, an d services related to your Nokia product. You may also download free configurat ion setting s such as MMS, GPRS, e-ma il, and other services for your device model at www.nokia- asia.com/phonesettings. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nokia Care cont act c entres at www.nokia- asia.com/contactus. For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia service centre a t www.nokia-asia.com/rep air. 19 Get started
Your Nokia E51 The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you how t o use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar entr ies, from a com patible Nokia device. See "Transfer content between devices," p. 23 . ⢠Settings wizard helps you configure v arious settings. See "Settings wizar d," p. 20 . ⢠Opera tor contains a link to your operator's home portal. To open the Welcome application lat er, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available items may vary between regions. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these services, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a d ata connection or other services. The av ailability of the di fferent settings items in Settings wizard depends on the features of the device, SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability of the data in the Sett ings wizard database. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your d evice. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are guided through the settings configurat ion. If there is n o SIM card inserted, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct, select the correct one from the list. If the settings configuration is interrupt ed, the settings are not defin ed. To access the main view of the Setting s wizard after the wizard has finished t he settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select Options and from t he following: 20 Your Noki a E51
⢠Opera tor â Configure operator-specific settings such as MMS, interne t, WAP, and stre aming settings. ⢠E-mail settings â Confi g ure e-mail settings. ⢠Push t o talk â Confi gure push-to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settin gs wizard, visit the Nokia phone se ttings web sit e. Standby modes Your device has two different standby modes: active standby mode and standby mode. Active standby After you have switched on your device and it is ready for use, but you have not entered any characters or made other selections, the device is in the active standby mode. In the active standby mode, you can view different indicators such as network operator indicators or indicators for alarms, an d applications you want to access fast. To select applications that you want to access from active stan dby, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active s tandby apps . . To change the fu nctions of the selection keys in active standby, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > General > Personalisation > Standb y mode > Shortcuts . To use the basic standby mode, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Activ e standby > Off . Standby In the basic standby mode, you can see y our servic e provider, time, and different indicators, such as indicators for alarms. To view the most recently dialled numbers, press the call key. Scroll to a number or name, and p ress the call key again to call the number. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold 1 . To view calendar in formation, sc roll right. To write and send text messages, scroll left. To change these shortcuts, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Shor tcuts . 21 Your Noki a E51
Menu Select Menu . The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in t he device or on a memory card. The menu conta ins applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default sa ved in the Installatio ns folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Opt ions > Change view > List view . To return to the grid view, select Options > Change view > Grid view . To make the application icons and folders animated, select Options > Icon animation > On . To view the memory consumption of different applications an d data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Option s > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Optio ns > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Optio ns > Download applications . Common actions in several applications You can find the following actions i n several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings that you have configured in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Optio ns > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. 22 Your Noki a E51
To send a file, select Options > Send . You can sen d a file in an e-mail or mult imedia message, or using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. To copy, press and hold t he shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to pas te the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This method may not wo rk in applications that have their own c opy and pas te command s. To select different items, such as messages, file s, or contacts, scroll to the item you wa nt to select. S elect Option s > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Optio ns > Mark/U nma rk > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for example, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Transfer Select Menu > Tools > Swit ch . You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a compatib le Nokia devic e to you r new Eser ies device using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. The type of content that can be transferred depends on th e device model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronis e data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Ese ries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your devi c e. Copying time depends o n the amou nt of data to be transferr ed. You can also cancel and con tinue later. The necessary steps for d ata transfer may vary depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer ea rlier. The items that you can transfer vary depend ing on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the tw o devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some de vice models, the Transfer application is sent to the other device as a mess age. To install Transfer on the othe r device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from the other device. After the data transfer, you can save the shortcut with the trans fer setting s to the m ain view to repeat the same transfer lat er. To edit the shortc ut, select Option s > Shortcut settin gs . 23 Your Noki a E51
View transfer log A transfer log is sh own after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll to the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Det ails . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved tra nsfer conflicts are also displayed i n the log view. To start so lving c onflicts, select Optio ns > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to your device with the Transfer appli cation , select from the following icons in the Transfer main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation , you can keep the data up-to-date in both devi ces. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other d evice. Personalisation You can personalise your device by adjusting the various tones, ba ckground images, and screen savers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customis e the ringing ton es, alert tones, and other device tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller grou ps. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display in the stan dby mode. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Cre ate new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Personal ise . To chang e a profile, select a profile an d Opti ons > Activate . The Offline profile prevents your device from accidentally switching on, sending or receiving messages, or using wirele ss LAN, Bluetooth, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connection that may be in operation when the pr ofile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth co nnection at a later time, or from restarting the FM radio, so comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using these features. 24 Your Noki a E51
To delete a profile that you created, select Option s > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profil es. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a p rofile, s elec t Options > Personalise > Ringing tone . Select a rin ging tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Galle r y. To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Opti ons > Personalise > Aler t for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group hav e a silent alert. To change th e message tone, select Option s > Personalise > Me ssage alert ton e . Customise profiles Select Options > Personalis e , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or se lect Downlo ad sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringin g tone fo r each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller' s name â When you select this option and someone from your cont acts list calls you, the device sounds a ringin g tone that is a combination of the spoken name o f the contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want the ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing vo lume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text message s. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e- mail messages. ⢠IM aler t tone â Select a tone for received instant messages . ⢠Vibrating alert â Select whether you want the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypa d tones â Set the volume level of the device keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Set the warning tones on o r off. ⢠Alert for â You can set the device to ring only upon calls from phone numbers th at belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile n ame â You can giv e a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Change the display theme Select Menu > T ools > Themes . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder . 25 Your Noki a E51
To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particular application, select the application-specific folder. To change the backgrou nd image fo r the standby mode, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an image or write a text for the screen saver, select the Powe r saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select Options > Download > Downlo ad themes . E nter the link from wh ich you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Optio ns > Set . Change audio themes Select Menu > Tools > Themes > Audio theme . You can set sounds for various device ev ents. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To set a sound for an event, open an event group, such as ringing tones , scroll to the desired event, and press the scroll key. To play the sound before activati ng it, select Options > Play voi ce . To create a new audio theme, select Op tions > Save theme . To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, select Options > 3-D ringing to nes . To set speech as the s ound for an event, select Speech . Enter the desired tex t to the text field. Th e Speech option is not available if you hav e set Say caller's name on in the current profile. To select a language for the speech, select Options > Set Speech language . To use all the preset sounds in an event group, scroll to the group, and select Options > Activate sounds . To silence all the sounds in an event group, select Optio ns > Deactivate sounds . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D ringing tones . To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones, select 3 -D ri nging t one effe cts > On . Not all ringing ton es support 3âÂÂD effe cts. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one dire ction to another. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. 26 Your Noki a E51
⢠Reverberatio n â To adjust the amount of echo, select the desired effect. ⢠Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther aw ay. This setting is not available for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Option s > Play t one . To adjust the volume of the rin ging tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Optio ns > Personalise > Ringing volume . Volume control To adjust the earpiece vo lume during a phone call or the volume o f the media a p plications, use the volume keys. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can access appl ications and tasks quickly. Each ke y has been assign ed an application an d a task. To change th ese, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > One-touch ke ys . Your network operator may have assigned a pplications to th e keys, in which case you cannot chan ge them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â E-mail key 4 â Calendar key Home key To access the m ain menu, press the ho me key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to ac cess the active standby. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll th e list. T o open the selected application , press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To clos e the selected application, press the backsp ace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts application, press the contacts key briefly. 27 Your Noki a E51
To create a new contact, press the contacts ke y for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applicati on, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a f ew secon ds. E-mail k ey To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a f ew secon ds. Multitasking You can have several applications open at the same time. To switch between ac ti ve applications, press and hold the home key, scroll to an app lication, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active ph one call and want to check y our calendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site , press th e home key to access th e menu, and op en the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message a nd press the scroll key. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applicat ions: device memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remain s, and how m uch memory is consumed by each data type, select Menu > Optio ns > Memory details > Phone me mory or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you h ave adequate memory , transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install application s to a compat ible memory card, installation files (. sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large am ounts of memory and prevent you from storin g other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia P C Suite to back up installation files to a comp atible PC, then use the fi le manager to remov e the ins t allation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the messa ge from the Messaging inbox . 28 Your Noki a E51
Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSD This device uses a microSD memory card. To ensure interoperability, use only compatible microSD cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a microSD card with its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD cards are no t compati ble with this device. Using an incompatible memo ry card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Insert the memory c ard Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You can als o back up inform ation from your device to the memory card. The sales package of your device may not in clude a memory card. Memory cards are available as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facin g you, press the release button (1) and slide the back cover off ( 2). 2. Insert the memory card i n the slot with the conta ct area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in unti l it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Option s > Format memo ry card . When a memory card is formatted, all da ta on the card is lost permanently. Cons ult your retailer to fi nd out if you must format the memory card before you c an use it. To change the na me of the memor y card, select Option s > Memory card name . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauth orised access. To set a password, select 29 Your Noki a E51
Optio ns > Set pass word . The password can be up to eight characters long an d is case-sensitive. Th e password is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you us e the memory car d in the same device. If you use the memory card in another device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Optio ns > Remove password . When you remove the passwo rd, the data o n th e memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Optio ns > Unlock memo ry card . Enter the password. Eject the memory card Important: Do n ot remo ve the m emory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card i n the middle of an operation may dama ge the mem ory card as well a s the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. 1. Press the power ke y briefly, and select Re move memory card . 2. Press the release button and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is sho wn on the t op right of th e display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of th e sentence is written in uppercase and all the oth er letters a re automatically written in lowercase. indicates the num ber mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as t he pr esent one, wait until the cursor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the uppe r and lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a charac ter, press the backs pace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase mo re than one character. To access the most common punctua tion marks, press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. 30 Your Noki a E51
To add specia l characters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space , press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. To switch between the differe nt character cases, pres s # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predictive t ext input, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive t ext input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found. If the ? charact er is shown after th e word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionar y, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) usin g traditional text inp u t, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is fu ll, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll rig ht. Writ e the last part of the com pound word. To complete the compound w ord, press 0 to add a space. To switch predictive text input off for all e d itors in the device, press # twice quickly. Change the writing language When you are writi n g text, you can ch ange the writing language. For examp le, if you press the 6 key repeatedly to r each a specific chara cter, chang ing the writing language g ives you access to characters in a different order. If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and want to w rite Latin charac ters, for example e-mail or web addresses, you m ay need to change the writing language. To change the writing langu age, select Option s > Writing language , and a writing language th at uses Latin characters. Antennas Note: Yo ur device may have internal and external antenn as. As with any ra dio transmitting device, avoid touchin g th e antenn a unnecessarily when the antenna is in u se. Contact with such an antenna aff ects the co mmunicatio n quality , may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. 31 Your Noki a E51
Further information Extended u ser guide An extended version of this user guide is available o n the Nokia web site. Some applications or functions are explained only in the extended user guide. Instructions in y our devi ce To read instructions for th e current view of the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics an d conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instru ct ions. Selec t a category , such as Messagi ng, to see wh at instructions (help topics) are available. Whil e you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to s ee the other topics in that categ ory. To switch between the application and help, press and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you information about your device and shows you how t o use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . 32 Your Noki a E51
Business communications Your device provides you with efficient tools for voice communication and contact a nd time management. Telephone To make and receive calls, the device must be switc hed on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To con nect to a net call service, your device must be in the c overage of a connection network, such as a WLAN ac cess point . Voice calls Note: The actual invoice for calls and ser vices from your service provider may vary, depending on network features , rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press th e call key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute th e ringing t one in stead of answering a ca ll, select Silence . When you have a n active call and the call waiting function (network service) is activated, pr ess the call key to answer a new incomi ng call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a ca ll Important: If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to activate the phone function. W hen the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise t he number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To make a call, enter t he phone number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For i nternational calls, a dd the character that replaces t he international acces s code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessar y), and phone number. To end the call or cancel th e call attempt, press the end key. 33 Business communica tions
To make a call using th e saved contacts, select Contacts in the standby mode. Enter t he first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press t he call key. See "Contacts," p. 42 . To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log," p. 41 . To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume keys . To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Optio ns > Switch t o video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference ca ll, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. Wh en th e par ticip ant an swer s, se lect Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Co nference to merge the calls into a conference call. T o m u t e t h e m i c r o p h o n e o f y o u r d e v i c e d u r i n g t h e c a l l , select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Conference > Drop part icipant . To discus s privately w ith a conference call participant, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Conference > Private . Fax calls To make and receive fax calls, connect your device to a compati ble com puter or fax mach ine. To activ ate the fax modem, select Opti ons > Activate mo dem . You can answer incoming fax ca lls only from the computer or fax machine connected to your device. To reject an incoming fax call, select Options > Reject . To reject a call while a fax call is in progress, select Reject . A fax call cannot be put on hold. Video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverag e of a UMTS net work. Fo r availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two -way video between you and the recipient of the call, if th e recipient has a compatible mobile phone. The video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. Make a video call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To make a video call, enter the phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select 34 Business communica tions
Option s > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, the came ra of the device is acti vated. If the camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in vi deo call . To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sendin g video , or Send ing aud. & video . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Option s > Activate loudspeaker . To mute t he loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of i m ages, select Options > Change image order . To zoom the image on the dis play, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a n ew voice call to the same recipient, select Opt ions > Switch to voice call . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. 1. Make a phone call to the se lected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phone call is established and your device has been regis tered to the SIP server. 2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share video > Live or Clip . To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the recipient's S I P address manually t o send an invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accept s the video sharing. 4. To end sharing t h e video, select Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sh aring invitat ion, a message is displayed showing the ca ller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation an d begin the sharing session, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net call s Select Menu > Connectivity > Internet te l. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency ca ll through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cell ular telephony, you should us e cellular networks for emergency calls, if possibl e. If you have cellular network coverage availa ble, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls 35 Business communica tions
before you attempt an emer gency call. The capability for an emergency call us ing internet telephony depends on the ava ilability of a WLAN a nd your net call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your n et call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the net call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN co verage, for example. The availability of th e net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you n eed to create a net call profile. 1. Sel ect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > SIP sett ings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automatic, select Registration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Sel ect Back until you return to the Connection settings main view. 3. Sel ect Intern et tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the p rofile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To set the created profile to be used automatically when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Connec tivity > Internet tel. > Pre ferred profil e . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When n eeded in the S IP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask your service p rovider for secure net call se ttings. The proxy se rver selected for the net call profile must support secure net calls. Connect to the net call service To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have s elected automatic login, your device automati cally connects to the net call service. If you lo gin to the s ervice ma nually, select an available netw ork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re fresh ed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh th e list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgo ing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Options > Configure s ervice . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the network to which you are curren tly connec ted, se lect Options > Save ne twork . The saved networks are marke d with a star on the list of networks. To connect to a net call service usin g a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hid den netwo rk . To end the connection to a net call service, select Optio ns > Disconnect from serv. . 36 Business communica tions
Make net ca lls You can ma ke a net call from all applications where yo u can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Call > Inte rnet call . To make a net call in the sta ndby mode, enter the SIP address, and pr ess the call key. To make a net ca ll to an address t h at does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferred call ty pe for outgoing calls, select Menu > Conne ctivity > Internet tel. > Option s > Settings > Default call type > Inte rnet call . When your device is connected to a ne t call service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings > Sett ings: . To login automatically to the net call ser vice, select Login type > Automati c . If you use th e automatic login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the n et call service and the networks detected by the net call service, select Saved conn. netw orks . To define the service-specific settings, select Edit service setti ngs . This option is on ly available if a service-specific software pl ug-in has been installed in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Cal l > Speed d ialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a n umber key in the stan dby mode. To assign a number key to a phon e number, select Menu > Tools > Sp eed dia l . Scroll to the n umber key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Opti ons > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Opt ions > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a n umber key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Opt ions > Change . Call divert Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Phone > Cal l divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. Fo r details, contact your service provider. Select to divert voice or fa x calls, and select from the following options: 37 Business communica tions
⢠All voice calls or All fax calls â Divert all inc oming voice or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before di verting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. T his option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or ou t of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another phone number, select a call type and a divertin g option, then s elect Options > Activate > Diverted to: . Enter a number in the Number : field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Cont acts. To check the current di verting status, s c roll to the diverting option, and select Opti ons > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Op tion s > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network servic e). To change th e settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Call barring and call divertin g cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be poss ible to cer tain official emergency numbers. To bar calls, select Voice call barring an d from the following options: ⢠Outgoing calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Intern ational calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls e xcept to ho me country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of vo ic e call barrings, select the barring option and Options > Check s tatus . To stop all voice call barri ngs, select a barring option and Options > C ancel all barrings . To change the pass word used for barring voice and fax calls, select Voice call barring > Opti ons > Edi t barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barri ng password must be four digits long. For det ails, contact your s ervice provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . 38 Business communica tions
To reject net calls from anonymous ca llers, select Anonymous cal l barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone mult i-frequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone serv ices. Send a DTMF tone s equence 1. Make a call, and wait unt il the other end answers. 2. Select Menu > Optio ns > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone se quence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Contacts . Open a contact, and select Options > Edi t > Options > Add detail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF ton es only after you select Se nd DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . Voice mail Select Menu > Tools > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for the first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > C all voice mailbox . If you have configured net ca ll settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Options > Call vo ice mailbox to call it. To call your voice mail in the standby mode, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call ma ilbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the internet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > T ools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application re ads text on the display, allowing you to use the ba sic functions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in you r contacts list, select Contacts . Do not use this option if you have more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and fr equent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your voice messages, se lect Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To hear the current tim e, select Clock > Time . To hear the current date, select Clock > Date . 39 Business communica tions
To hear more options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions desi gnated in the Voice commands ap plication. When a voice com m and is spoken , the device com pares the s poken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the mai n userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag fo r a contact is the name or ni ckname that is saved on the contact in Contacts. Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you s hould not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circ umstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a cont act, and select Optio ns > Play v oice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key . 2. When you hear the tone or see th e visual display, clearly speak the name saved on the contact. 3. The device plays a synthesi sed voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and nu mber. After a timeou t of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact wa s not cor rect, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under the contact, the device selects the default nu mber, if it has been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first availa ble number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business ) , Telephone , Te l. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice commands application. To launch an application using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, an d clearly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the list, select Op tions > New applicat ion . To change the voice comman d of an application, select Optio ns > Change command , and enter the new comman d. 40 Business communica tions
Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice comman d, select Profiles > Option s > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the synthesi ser that plays recogni sed voice commands in the sele cted device language, select Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition le arning when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove v oice adapts. . Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. T he device registers missed and received calls only if th e network supports these functions, the device is sw itched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls, select Recent call s . Tip: To open Dialled numbers in the standby modes, press the call key. To view the approximate dura tion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred during packet data connections, se lect Packet data . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls , text messages, or data connections registered by th e device, open the general log tab. To view detailed inform ation about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a text m essage se nt in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one com munication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contact s, select Options > Save to Cont acts , and select to create a new contact or to add the phone number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication ev ents with one other p arty, select Option s > Filter , and select the desired filter. 41 Business communica tions
To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Optio ns > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Optio ns > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls and o pen Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled number s . Select the caller, and select Option s > Create message . You can send t ext messages and multimedia me ssages. Log settin gs To set the time for keepin g all communication events in the log, select Optio ns > Sett ings > Log duration , an d the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . You can save and update conta ct information, such as phone numbers, home addresse s, or e-mail addresses of your c ontac ts. You ca n add a personal rin ging tone or a thum bnail image to a cont act. You can also creat e contact groups, which allow you to send tex t or e-mail messages to man y recipients at the same time. You can add received contact inform ation (business cards) to Contacts. Cont act information c an only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Copy contacts between SIM and device memory If you already have contacts saved on your SIM card, you can copy them to the device memory. To copy contacts from a SIM card to the device memory, select Option s > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Mark the contacts to copy, or se lect Option s > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark all to copy all contacts. Se lect Optio ns > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts from th e device memory to a SI M card, select Options > Copy to SIM directory . Mark the contacts you want to cop y, or select Options > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark all to copy all contacts. Se lect Optio ns > Copy to SIM directory . Tip: If you have saved contacts on your previous device, you can use the Transfer application to copy them. See "Transfer content between devices," p. 23 . Manage contacts To add a new contact, select Optio ns > New contact . 42 Business communica tions
To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact, select Option s > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnai l image is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag as signed to the contact, select Option s > Play voi ce tag . To search for a contact, en ter the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the cont acts starting with the letters ap pear on the display. To edit information in a contact, select Optio ns > Edit . Tip: You can als o use Nokia PC Sui t e to add and edit contacts. To send contact information, select Options > Se nd . You can assig n a default numbe r o r address to a contact so you can easily call or send a messa ge to the default number or address, even if several numbers or addresses are saved to tha t contact. The default number is also used in voice dialling. To change the defau lt information for a contact, op en the cont act, and select Options > Defaults . Select the number or address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the cont act. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). Tip: To ch eck to w hich groups a contac t belongs , select Options > Belongs to groups . To add a speed dial key to the contact' s phone number, select Option s > Assign speed dial . To change the display order of the first and last na mes of your cont acts, s elect Options > Sett ings , and Last name First name , or First name Last name . Manage contac t groups You can create a contact group so t hat you can send messages t o several recipie nts at the same time. 1. Open the contact grou ps tab, and select Options > New group . 2. Enter a name for the group, and select OK . 3. Open the group, and select Optio ns > Add members . 4. Scroll to each contact you want to a dd to the group, and press the scroll key to mark it. 5. Select OK to add all marked contacts to the group. To remove a contact from a con tact group, scroll to the contact that you want to remove, and select Options > Remove from group . Add ringing tones for contacts You can select a ringin g tone for a contact or contact group. If the caller's phone number is sent wit h the incoming call and your devi ce recognises the number, the ringin g tone p lays when the contac t calls you. To select a ringing t one for a contact or contact group, open the conta ct or contact g roup, and select Option s > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. Select the ringing to ne you want to use. 43 Business communica tions
To remove the assigned ri nging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Send business cards To send a busine ss card, select th e contact from Contacts, select Options > Send , and the sendi ng method. Enter the phone numb er or address, or add a reci pie nt fr om Co ntacts. Select Opt ions > Send . If you select text mess age as the sen d ing method, business cards are sent wi thout thumbnai l images. Manage received business cards To view a received business card, select Open from the displayed notification, or open the message from the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. To save a received bu siness card, select > Save business card . SIM directory Select Opti ons > SI M contacts > SIM directory . In the SIM directory, you can see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card; add, edit, or copy numbers to contac ts ; and make calls. To view a SIM contact, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add contacts to your SI M directory, select Options > New SIM contac t . Enter the contact information and select Done . To view the list of fixe d dialling numbers, select Optio ns > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . Th is setting is only shown if su pported by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your device to selected phone numbers , select Options > Activate fixed di alling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your serv ice provider if you do not ha ve the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Optio ns > New SIM cont act . You need the PIN2 code for this function. When yo u use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text mess ages over a packet data connection. In this case, the messag e centre number and the recipient's phone number mu st be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixe d dialling is activ ated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To view your own numbers, if stored on the SIM card, select Options > My numbers . Fo r example, you may have subscribed to two phon e lines with the same SIM card. Not a ll SIM cards cont ain your own nu mbers. To edit the contact information, select Options > Edit . To copy the contact from the SIM directory to Contacts, select Options > Copy to Contacts . To check the amount of fr ee memory on your SIM card, select Options > SIM card details . 44 Business communica tions
Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . You can c reate and vi ew scheduled events and appointments. You can also set ala rms for calenda r entries. To synchroni se your calendar data with a compatible computer, use Nokia PC Suite. See the Nokia PC Suite guide. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries have a specific date and time. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Annivers ary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entri es remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calenda r entry, scroll to a date, and select Option s > New en try . Select the entry type. The available settin gs for meeting, memo, anniversary, and to-do entries vary. Select from the following: ⢠Subject or Occasion â Enter a description for the entry. ⢠Loc atio n â Enter the locati on information. ⢠Star t time â Enter the start time . ⢠End time â Enter the end time. ⢠Start date or Date â Ente r the start date or date the event occurs. ⢠End date â Enter the end dat e. ⢠Alarm â Set an alarm for meeting and annivers ary entries. The alarm is displayed in the day view. ⢠Repeat â Specify whether you want the entry to be repeated and when. Define th e repeat type, frequency, and poss ible ending date. ⢠Synchronisatio n â If you selec t Private , the calendar entry can be seen only by you and is not shown to others with on line access to view th e calendar. If you select Public , the calendar entry is shown to others who ha ve access to view your calendar online. If you select Non e , the calendar entry is not copied to your computer when you synchronis e. Tip: Make sure you have selected the correct city in the Clock application, because scheduled calendar entries may change when the current city is changed and is on another time zone. To edit an existing entry, scroll to the entry , and select Option s > Open . Edit the details in the various fields. To delete a calendar entry, select Op tions > Del ete , and select Before date to delete all entries before the selected date, or All entries to delete all calendar entries from the device. Tip: When you edit or de lete a repeat ed entry, choose how y ou want t he ch a n g e t o t a k e e ff e c t . If you selec t All calendar en tries dele ted , all repeated entries are deleted. If you select Delete entry , only the current entry is deleted. 45 Business communica tions
To send a calendar entry to a compatible device, select Optio ns > Send > Via text me ssage , Via multim edia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displa yed corre ctly. To add a received calendar entry to your calendar, open the calendar entry attach ment in the message, and select Options > Save to Calendar . To respond to a received calendar entry, select Accept , Tentativ e , or Decline , if available. If you accept the entry or mark it as tentative, the entry is added to your calendar. You can send a response to the sender of the calendar entry by e-mail. Select Yes , and the message is saved in Ou tbox to wait for sending. Create a meeting entry 1. Scroll to a date, and select Op tions > New entry > Meeting . 2. Enter the subject, location, start and end time, and the start and end dates, if needed. 3. To set an alarm for the meeting, s elect Alarm > On . Enter the alarm tim e and date. 4. Select whether this is a repeating meeting. 5. Define how the ent ry is handled during synchronisation in the Synchronis ation field. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers if the calendar is availab le online, or None to prevent copying the entry to your computer when you synchronise. To-do entries You can create and ma intain a task or list of tas ks that must be done by a certai n day. Each task can be assigned a due date, and an alarm. Create a to-do e ntry 1. Scroll to a date, an d select Opt ions > New entry > To-do . 2. Enter th e subject in th e Subject field. 3. Enter th e due date. 4. To set an ala rm for the t o-do entry, select Alarm > On . Enter the alarm tim e and date. 5. Specify a priority. The priority icons are ( ! ) High and ( - ) Low . There is no icon for Norm al . 6. Define how the ent ry is handled during synchronisation in the Synchronisation field. Select Pr ivate to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is availa ble online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available online, or None to not copy the entry to your computer when you synchronise. Calendar views The Calendar ha s four views: in the month view, you can see the entire month at one time; the week view shows the events for the se lected week in s even day boxes; the day view shows the events for the selected 46 Business communica tions
day; and the to-do view sh o ws the to -do items fo r the selected day. Work in different views To switch between the differe nt calenda r views, select Option s in any calendar view. Select the type of view from the list. To set the default calendar view, select Optio ns > Settin gs > Default v iew , and the view you want. To view a specific date, select Options > Go to date , and enter the date. Month view Select Options > Month view . In the month view, you can s ee the entire month at one time. Each row shows one week of dates. The active month is displayed, and the active day is either toda y or the last day that was viewed. The active day is marked with a coloured square. Day s that have scheduled events are marked with a small triangle. Press the scroll key to open the day's entry. Week view Select Options > Week view . The week view show s the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. Today's date is marked with a coloured square. Memos and a nniversaries are p laced before 8:00 a.m. To change th e starting day of the week, select Option s > Sett ings > Week starts on . Day view Select Option s > Day view . The day view shows the even ts for the selected day. Entries are grouped into time slots according to their startin g time. T o view th e previou s or next day , scroll left or right. To-do view Select Option s > To-do view . The to-do view shows the to -do items for the selected day. To mark a task as completed, select Opti ons > Mark as done . To restore a task, select Options > Mark as not done . Calendar settings Select Option s > Settings . To change the ala rm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view dis p layed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week starts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week numbe r or We ek dates . 47 Business communica tions
Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network service), you need to configure the internet access point setti ngs. If you are using a GPRS connection, your wireless network must support GPRS, and the service mus t be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access poi nt settings from your service provider as a special text message or from th e service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points," p. 97 . Check the availabi lity of serv ices, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unreadable or not supported and garbage code is found whil e browsing , you can t ry to select Menu > Web > Options > Page > Defau lt encodin g , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indi cator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data tran smission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure . The serv ice provider secures t he data transmission between the ga teway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . U se only services that you trust an d that offer adequa te security and protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your inp ut are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, an d press the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is shown as a pointer on the pa ge. When you move the pointer over a link, the p ointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually ap pear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. The address es of the pag es you visit are saved in th e Auto. bookmarks folder. 48 Business communica tions
Bookmarks Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party int ernet sites. You may a lso access oth er third-part y sites through y our device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with Nokia , and Nokia does not endorse or ass ume liability for them. If you choose to access such site s, you should take precautions for security or content. To view a bookmarked web page, scroll to the bookma rk, and press t he scroll key. To browse to another web page, select Options > Navigation options > Go to web addre ss , enter th e page address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark, select Optio ns > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, sele ct Options > Bookmark manager in the Web main view. You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or ha ve accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services yo u have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and blogs Select Menu > We b > Web f eeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening of weblog, which is a cont inuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Option s > Manage feed > New feed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection an d view the browser page offline, select Options > Tool s > Disconnect . To end the connection and clos e the browser, select Option s > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > We b > Options > Settings . The Web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠Gener al contains access point and home page relate d setti ngs. ⢠Page contains imaging, aud io, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy con tains settings related your privacy. ⢠Web feeds contains settings related to web feeds and blogs. 49 Business communica tions
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messaging (network se rvice), you can send and receive te xt messages, multimedia me ssages, audi o messages, a nd e-mail messages . You can also re ceive web service messages, cell broadcast messag es, and special message s containing dat a, and send servi ce commands . Before sending or receiv ing messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the ne twork supports the m essaging features you want to us e and that they are a ctivated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access poin t settings on the device. See "Internet access point s," p. 97 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settings on the device. See "E-mail account settings," p. 62 . ⢠Define the text messa ge setting s on the device. See "Text message settin gs," p. 60 . ⢠Define the multimedia me ssa ge settings on the device. See " Multimedia me ssage settings," p. 61 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message se ttings. If not, you may need to defi ne the settings man ually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data rece ived using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inb ox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Mess ages that are wa iting to be sent are stored in the Outbo x folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth and infrared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages ar e placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is ou tside network coverage. You can also sche dule e-mail messa ges to be sent the next time you conn ect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not in dicate that the message is received at the intended dest ination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages an d multimedia messages you have sent (network service), select Options > 50 Messaging
Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organise messages To create a new folder to organise your messages, select My folders > Optio ns > New fo lder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . Yo u can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to another folder, select Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Opti ons > Sort b y . You can sort the messages by Dat e , Sender , Subject , o r Message type . To view the properties of a message, select the message a nd Optio ns > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages aloud. The message reader cannot read e-ma il mess ages in add-on e-mail applications. To play a mess age, press and hold the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading a messa ge in Inbox or mailbox, s elect Option s > Listen . To start reading th e next mess age in I nbox or ma ilbox, scroll down. To start r eading the mess age again, scroll up. In the beginning of the me ssage, scroll up to hear the previous message. To pause the reading, pre ss the left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > T ools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the message rea der, select Language . To download additiona l languages to your device, visit th e Nokia web site or use the Download! applicati on. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language-dependent. To set the sp eaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the sp eaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Play voice . 51 Messaging
E-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with internet standards SMTP, IM AP4 (rev isio n 1), and PO P3, and with different vendor-specific e-mail solutions. Other e-mail providers may offer services with different settings or features tha n those described in this user guide. Contact your e-mail provi der or service provider for more details. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail on your device, you must also do the following: ⢠Configure an internet access point. See "Internet access points," p. 97 . ⢠Set up an e-mail ac count, and de fine the e-mail settings correctly. To do this, use the mailbox guide, or define the account ma nually. See "E-mail account settings," p. 62 . Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide If you sele ct Menu > Messaging > Mailbox , and have not set u p your e-ma il account, yo u are prompted to do so. To start settin g up the e-ma il account wit h the mailbox guide, select Yes . 1. To start entering the e-mail settings, select Start . 2. In Mailb ox type , select IMAP4 or POP3 , and select Next . Tip: POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e- mail or internet mail message s from a serve r. IMAP4 is a version of the internet message access protocol that lets you access and manage e-mail messages wh ile the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to your device. 3. In My e-ma il address , enter your e-mail address. Select Next . 4. In I ncoming mail server , enter the name of the remote server that receiv es your e-mail, and s elect Next . 5. In Outgoing mail server , enter the name of the remote server that send s your e-mail, and select Next . Depending on your mobile operator, you might have to use your mobile operator' s outgoing mail server instead of your e-mail provider's. 6. In Acce ss point , select the internet access point your device should us e when it retrieves the e-mail. If you se lect Alway s ask , each time the device starts to retrieve e-mail, it as ks which internet access point it should use. Select Next . 7. Enter a name for your new mailbox, and select Finish . When you create a new mailbox, th e name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailb ox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. 52 Messaging
If you have defined several mailboxes , select one of them as your default mail box. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a ne w e-mail message. To def ine the default mai lbox, select Options > Settin gs > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not au tomatica lly received by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to th e remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you w ish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your mailbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mail box? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Optio ns > Retrie ve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither rea d nor retrieved, Sele cted to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailbox, or All to retrieve all me ssages not previously retrieve d. 4. To manage your e-mail o ffline to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow a data co nnectio n, sele ct Options > Disconnect to disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the nex t time you go online an d synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise c aution when opening messages. E-mail messages may con tain malicious software or o therwise be harm ful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Opti ons > Attachmen ts . Scroll to the attachment, a nd press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Option s > Reply > To sender . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you repl y to an e-mail that contains attached files, the attachments are n ot included in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail, the attachments are included. To forward an e-mail, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Options > Insert and the attach ment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending, selec t the attachm ent and Option s > Remove . To set the message priority , select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for the e- mail message, select Option s > Send ing option s > Send mess age . Select Immediat ely , or selec t When conn. avail. if you are working offline. 53 Messaging
To call the sender of the e- mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio message or mult imedia messa ge, select Optio ns > Create message . Write and send e- mail 1. To write an e-mail, select Ne w message > E- mail . 2. Sel ect Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Contacts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. 3. In t he Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from the In box and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (header remains) . To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote server, sele ct Optio n s > Delete > Pho ne and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Rest ore . Subfolders in your remote e- mail If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage thes e folders with your device when you subscribe to th em. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, es tablish a connection, and select Options > E-mail settings > Retrieval settings > Folder s ubscripti ons . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if th e folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Optio ns > Update fold er list . Text messages Select Menu > Messaging . Write and send text messages Select Menu > Messaging . Your device supports the sending of text messa ges beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messages are se nt as two or more messages. Your 54 Messaging
service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents or other marks, and ch aracters from so me language opti ons, take up more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message . 1. To write a text message, sele ct New mess age > Text message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, sep arate the numbers with a semi colon. 3. Enter the text of the messag e. To use a template, select Option s > Insert > Te mplate . 4. Select Optio ns > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message centre to sen d the messa ge, select Option s > Sendi ng options > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages ( network service ), select Options > Sending o ptions > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssa ge centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails, select Option s > Sending options > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. To convert the message to another format, select Option s > Send ing option s > Message sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , o r E-mai l . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages in to these other formats. Contact your service provider. Text messag es on th e SIM card Select Option s > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can vi ew SIM me ssages, y ou must copy the messages to a folder in th e device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Opt ions > Co py . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the messages, and open a mess age. View pict ure messages Note: The appearance of a picture message m ay vary depending on the receiving device. To view a picture message, open the message from the Inbox folder. 55 Messaging
To view information about the picture message, select Optio ns > Message details . To save a messa ge in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Cont acts, select Optio ns > Save to Contacts . Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Option s > Forward . 2. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a reci pient from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, separa te the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your mess age. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Sel ect Options > Send . Tip: To remove the picture from the mess age, select Opti ons > Remove picture . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that ha ve comp atible features can receive and display multimedia me ssages. The appearan ce of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS ) can cont ain text and objects such as images, so und clips, or video clips. Before you can send or re ceive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia message settin g s. Your de vice may ha ve recognised the SIM card provider and automatica lly configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact your service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settin g s," p. 61 . Create and send multimedia messages Impor tant: Exercise caution w hen opening messages. Messa ges may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new mess age, select New message > Multimedia message . 2. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scro ll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. In t he Subj ect field, enter a subjec t for the message. To change the fie lds that are visible, select Options > Addre ss fie lds . 4. Enter the text of the mess age, and select Options > Insert obje ct to add media objects. You can add objects such as Imag e , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your 56 Messaging
message, select Options > Insert new > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message, select Option s > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it, sel ect Options > Preview . 7. Select Optio ns > Send . To delete an object from a multimedia message, select Option s > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, select Optio ns > Sending options . Receive and re ply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Option s > Reply . 2. Select Options and To sender to reply to the s ender with a multimedia message, Via text me ssage to reply with a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with an audio message, or Via e- mail to reply with an e- mail mess age. Tip: To add recipients to your reply, select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients of the message from Contacts, or enter the recipients' phone numbers or e- mail addresses manua lly in the To field. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Send . Create presentations Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if the MMS creation mod e setting is set to Restricted . To change the setting, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > MMS creation mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select Ne w message > Multimedia mess age . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press th e scroll key to add a recipient from Conta c ts. If you e n ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Opt ions > Create presentat ion and a presentati on template. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they ap pear, and which effects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text ar ea and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Opti ons > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New sli de . 57 Messaging
To select the background colour for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Optio ns > Background settings . To set effects between images or s lides, select Optio ns > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedi a presentations may only be viewed in compatible devices th at support presentations. They may appe ar different in different devic es. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scro ll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the pres entation, select Opti ons > Continue . If the text or i mages are too large to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You may u se these numbers and addresses to make calls, se nd messages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open th e message, and select Optio ns > Play pr esentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an attachment, open the message, an d select Options > Object s . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a mu ltimedia notification, and press the scroll key. To send th e message to a compatible device without retr ieving it to your device, select Options > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scro ll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . 58 Messaging
Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending optio ns . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an audio message, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipi ent's number or e-mail address, or pre ss the scroll key to a dd a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separa te them with a semicolon. 3. Select Optio ns > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Optio ns > Send . Sending options for multimedia messages Select New messag e > Mult imedia mes sage > Option s > Sendi ng options and fr om the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the message has been successfully delivered to th e recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message th at has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng the mess aging centre tries to send the me ssage. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached w ithin the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messagin g centre. The network must support this feature. Maxi mum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by th e network. Special message types Select Menu > Me ssaging . You can recei ve special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account sett ings. To save the contents of these messages, select Option s > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news headlines, servi c es, or links th rough which the m essage c ontent can be download ed. To define the service message settings, select Option s > Sett ings > Service me ssage . To downloa d the servic e or message co ntent, select Option s > Download message . To view informati on about the sender, web a ddress, expiration date, and other details of the message before downloading it, select Option s > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service request message (also known as a USSD command) to your service provider and 59 Messaging
request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service comma nd . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging > Opti ons > Cel l broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t mess ages cannot be received w hen the d e v i c e i s i n t h e r e m o t e S I M m o d e . A p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S ) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast mess ages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Optio ns > Subs cribe . Tip: You can set important top ics as hot t opics. While the device is in the st andby mode, you are notified when you rece ive a message rela ted to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Optio ns > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Optio ns > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging > Opti ons > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configur e the correc t te xt message, multimedia message, and GPRS se ttings automatically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or us e the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the ava ilable message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Redu ced supp ort to use automatic cha racter conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if yo u want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails 60 Messaging
(network service). If the recipient cannot be reached within the vali dity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format , such as Te xt , Fax , Pagi ng , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message cent re is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text message s from your device . ⢠Reply v ia sa me centre â Select wh ether you want the reply messa ge to be sent using the same t ext message centre numbe r (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Options > Settings > Multim edia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Small or Larg e to scale images in multimedia me ssages. Se lect Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may n ot be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about includin g such content, se lect Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attach ment type, select Free . If you select Restricted , creating multimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multim edia message centre. You may n ot be able to ch ange the default access point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia ret rieval â Select Always automatic to receive multimed ia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new mult imedia me ssage that y ou can retrieve from the message centre (for example, when you are travelling abroa d and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedi a messages from the message centre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any mult imedia message s. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive me ssages from un known sende rs. ⢠Receive advert s â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes to have the s tatus of the sent m essage to be sho wn in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been se nt to an e-mail ad dress may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia m essages. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng th e messagin g centre tries to send the message (network service). If the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached within the validity p eriod, the messa ge is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the ma ximum amount of time allowed by the network. 61 Messaging
E-mail account settings Select Menu > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox settings but have not set up an e-mail account, the ma ilbox gui de opens and helps you set up your e-mail account. If yo u have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the setti ngs. The settings available for editing may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection se ttings, select an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection settings . To edit the settings fo r the e-mail you receive, select Incom ing e-mail . To edit the setting s for the e- mail you s end, select Outgoing e-ma il . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User setti ngs , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a nam e to appear before yo ur e- mail address when you sen d e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Selec t whether yo u want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You ca n only enter one add ress to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whet her you want to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device an d the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send mess age â Select to send the e-mail immediately or when a co nnection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail add ress in the Outgoi ng e-mail settings . ⢠Include signature â Select whet her you want to attach a si gnature to your e-mail messages. ⢠New e-mail ale rts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail message with a tone and a note . Retrieval settings To define the retrieval se ttings, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retri eval settings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to re trieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header information such as sender , subjec t and dat e, e-ma il, or e- mail with attachment s. This setting i s for POP3 mailbox es only. ⢠Retrieval amo unt â Select the number of e-mail messages yo u want to ret rieve from the r emote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder path â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Th is setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. 62 Messaging
Automatic retrieval settings To define the automatic retrieva l settings for an e-mail account, select th e account, select Opt ions > Edit > Automatic re trieval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retr ieval â Select Enabled to retrieve new e-mail messages a u tomatically from your remot e mailbox, or Only in home net w. t o r e t r ie v e n e w e - mail messages au tomatically from your remote mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠Retrieval days â Select the days on which e-mai l is retrieved to your device. ⢠Retrieval hours â Define the hours between whi c h the e-mail is retrieved. ⢠Retrieval interval â S elect the interval between retrievin g new e-mail me ssages. ⢠E-mail notifications â Select whether you want to receive notifications on received e-mail. Service message settings Select Menu > Messagi ng > Optio ns > Settings > Service mess age . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service messages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Options > Settin gs > Service mess age > Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If y ou select Automatically , you may still need to con firm some downloads since not all services can be downloaded automa tically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging > Option s > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . To receive ce ll broadcast messages, select Reception > On . To select the languages in wh ich you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e cell broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging > Option s > Setti ngs > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Numbe r of sav ed msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reache d, the oldest messa ge is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You ca n save messages t o the memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder v iew â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. 63 Messaging
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools sup port mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active n otes . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping li sts. Y ou can insert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, su ch as Contacts, and send notes to others . Create and edit notes To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, scroll t o it, and press the scroll key. To insert images, sound clip s, video, business card s, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Insert object . To add new items to the note, se lect Options > Insert new . You ca n record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the text. Then select Optio ns > Text . To send the note u sing a tex t messag e, multimedia message, e-mail, Bluetooth, or infrared, select Optio ns > Send . To link a n ote to a co ntact, select Options > Link note to cal l > Add contacts . You can s ee the note on the display of your device when ma king a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Settings . To save notes to your device mem ory, select Memory in use > Phone me mory . To save them to a memory card, sel ect Memo ry in use > Memory card . To chang e the layout of active n otes, select Change view > Gr id . To view the notes as a list , select Change view > List . To see a note in the ba ckground when making or receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l > Yes . 64 Nokia Office Tools
Tip: If you te mporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between note s and contact cards. Search Select Menu > Office > In-dev ice search . With Search, you can search for information in your contacts, notes, ca lendar appointments, to-do notes, e-mail messages, multim edia messages, and text messages. You can also search for files by the file names in your device memory and memory card. Search for information 1. Select the content type s you want to search in. To remove the selection, select it again. To include all content types in your search, select Select all . 2. Enter your search keywords o r some part of the keywords. 3. Select Search . Tip: Wildcards may help you find items. In your search keyword, us e ? to substitute a s ingle character, and * to substitute zero or more characters. If you use a wildcard, add * to the beginning and end of the search keyword. To view the sea rch results from your previou s search, select Option s > Previous resul ts . Search results To open the content, select the desired search result. You may then use the co nten t, for example, to answer e-mail messa ges or edit documents. To conduct a new se arch, select Options > New search . Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator ha s limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculat ion, ente r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function m ap. Enter the second number of the calculation, an d select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a n ew calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the Calculator applicati o n or switching off the device do es not clear the memo ry. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Opti ons > Last result . To save the number s or results of a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a calculat ion, select Opt ions > Memory > Recall . 65 Nokia Office Tools
File manager With File manager, you ca n manage the contents and properties of files and folders on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may pr event sending som e files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and selec t Optio ns > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Op tions > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . E nter the search text, and press t h e scroll key. The folders and files whos e names conta in the sear ch text are displaye d. To view information about the selected file, select Optio ns > Deta ils . To view additional information about the file online, select Options > Additional details . Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word, Quicksheet for Microsoft Exce l, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint, and Quickm anager for purchasing software . You can view Mi cr osoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.pp t) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. All file formats or feat ures are not supported. Work with files To open a file, scr oll to the correspo nding tab, select the file, and press the scroll key. To create a new file, select Options > New file > Quickwor d or Quicksheet . To sort files according to the type, select Options > Sort by . To view the details of a file, select Options > Details . The details include the name, size and location of the file, and the time and date when the file was last modified. To send files to a compatible device, select Op tions > Send and the s ending method. Nokia Team suite Select Menu > Office > Teams . With Nokia Team Sui te, you can create, edit, and delete teams, and send mes s ages, view te ams' web pages a nd communication history, and make phone calls to teams. 66 Nokia Office Tools
Work with teams To create a new team, select Options > Team > Create new . Giv e a name for the t eam and enter the conference call service information, if needed. Then select the members for the team. To select an action, first select the t eam to which you want to apply the acti on, then scroll to the action bar, and select the desired act ion. If you do not want to apply the act ion to all team members , open the team, and select the desired member s. Then select the action. To find more action s than are shown on the action bar, select Option s > Actions . The following actions are available: ⢠Call â Make a phone call to the team or selected team members. The team members are called one b y o n e a n d p u t o n h o l d u n til the calls can be merged into a conference call (netw ork serv ice) . Th e maximum number of partic ipants depends on the network service. ⢠Create message â Sen d a text message, a multimedia message, or an e-mail to the team or selected team members. ⢠Call conf erence servi ce â Start a call to the conference call service (network service) defined for the selected team. ⢠Communication log â View the communication log for the team or selected team members. ⢠Active not es â Write and read notes related to th e team. ⢠Team search â Search for content related to the team or select ed team members. ⢠Push t o talk â Communica te through push to talk (network service) with th e team or selected team members. ⢠Team Web bookm arks â Open the bookmark folder that contains t he team web pages. Edit teams To add team members, select Options > Members > Add . To remove team members, select Op tions > Members > Remove . To edit the details of a member, select Op tions > Members > Edit . To see to which tea ms a member belongs, se lect Option s > Members > Belongs to teams . Nokia Team Suite se ttings To select whether to see the team members' pictures on the display, select Options > Settings > View contact image . To define the plug-in settin gs, select Op tion s > Settings > Plug-i n settings . This setting is available only if there are plug-ins to configure. Action bar settings Select Option s > Settings > Action bar icons . To show action buttons in the action bar, select the desired actions. To hide ac tions, remove the selection. 67 Nokia Office Tools
To change the order of the action buttons, select an action, and Opt ions > Move up , Move down , Move to top , or Move to bottom . Tip: If you select not to show all actions in the action bar, you can sti ll access the actions by selecting Op tions > Actions . Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conversion t ype t o op en a li st o f m ea su r es . S el e ct the measure to use, an d select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which t o convert, and select OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amo unt field changes automatically to show the con verted value. Set base curren cy and exchange rat e Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously s et exchange rates are cleared. Before you can mak e currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exch ange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the ex change rate you would like to set per sing le unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Sel ect Done > Yes to save the changes. After you have inserted all the nec essary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archi ve files to store compressed ZIP formatted fi les; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the ar chive password for protected 68 Nokia Office Tools
archives; an d change setting s, such as compression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive fi les on the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe Re ader . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; m odify setti ngs, such as zoom level and page views; and sen d PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can print a messag e or file from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a pr inter, or print to a file. You may not be able to print all messages, such as multimedia messag es or other specia l messages. Print files To configur e a printer for your device, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Set as default . Before you print, make sure your device is properly connected to the printer. To print a message or a file, select Optio ns > Print . To print to a file, select Optio ns > Printing options > Print to fi le , and determ ine the location for the file. To change th e printi ng options, select Options > Printing options . You can select the prin ter you want to use, the number of copi es and the range of pages you want to p r int. To change th e page layout before printing, select Option s > Printi ng options > Page setup . You can change the paper size a n d orientation, define the margins, an d insert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Option s > Printing op tions > Previe w . Printing options Open a file or message, and select Options > Printing options . Define the follo wing options: ⢠Printer â Select an available print er from the list. ⢠Print â Select All page s , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copies â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to fil e â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. 69 Nokia Office Tools
Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â E nter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the ho st. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orient ation â Se lect the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit al arms, or modify date an d time settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm fo r 5 minutes, s elect Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on an d starts sounding the alarm tone. If you selec t Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. S elect No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To chang e the alarm t ime, select Options > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Options > Add city . To change the city that determines the time a nd date in your device, select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the Clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and m atches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To chang e the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby modes, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . 70 Nokia Office Tools
To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone inform ation to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-updat e . To change the ala rm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Not es . You can cr eate and send notes to other comp atible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes . Write a nd send notes To write a note, start en tering the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, scroll to it, and press th e scroll key. To send a note to other compatible devices, select Option s > Send . To synchronise or t o define synchronisati on settings for a note, select Options > Synchron isation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. 71 Nokia Office Tools
Free time Your device contains a variety of media applications for both business and lei s ure time usage. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an im age capture resolution of up to 1600x1200 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use th e display as a viewfinder, aim at your subject, and press the scroll key. T he device saves the image in the default folder, or in the fo lder you have defined . Tip: To zoom in or out before taking a picture, scroll up or down. If you do not want to keep the captured image, select Optio ns > Delet e . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to capture another image. Select Options > Go to Galle ry to view the image in Gallery. If the light is dim, select Options > Night mo de before capturing an image. To adjust the image, select Opti ons > Adju st > White balance or Colour tone . To capture images in a sequence, select Op tions > Sequence mode . The camera captures six images in a row. To capture timed images, select Option s > Se lf- timer , s elect the desired time-out, and p ress Activate . The camera capt ures an image after the time- out has pa ssed. Tip: To access the various camera modes quickly, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the captured images, select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Record a video clip 1. Scroll to the video tab to activate the video recorder. 2. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key. The remaining recording ti me is shown on the top of the display. 3. To pause the recording, select Pause ; to resume the recording, select Continue . 72 Free time
4. To stop the recording, select Stop . The device saves the clip in the default folder, or in the folder yo u have defined. 5. If you do not want to keep the saved video clip, select Option s > Dele te . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to record another video clip. Select Options > Play to view the video clip in the RealPlayer application. Camera settings Select Options > Settings . To adjust image quality, to select whether images remain on the display after captu ring them, and to change resolution, default name, or memory in which to save your new images, select Imag e . To change th e length, resolution, and default name of the videos you record or th e memory in which t o save them, select Video . Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, music, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all received music and sounds are automatically saved to Gallery. Soun d clips are opened in the Music pl ayer, and video clips and streaming links in the RealPlayer app lication. Ima ges are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, sc roll to it, and press the scroll key. To create a new folder, select a file and then select Option s > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Copy t o memor y car d , Copy to ph one mem. , or Mov e to phone mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , Downld. tracks , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files th at match the search are shown. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Optio ns > Open . To open the next or previou s image for viewing, scroll right or left. To enlarge the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . 73 Free time
To view the image in full screen size, select Optio ns > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Normal screen . To rotate the image, select Op tions > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the im age counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed information about the image, select Optio ns > View details . To send the image, select Op tions > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the ima ge, s ele ct Options > Rename . To set the image as the display background , select Optio ns > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, s elect Options > Add to cont act . The Contacts app lication o pens, and y ou can select the cont act for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > Real Player . RealPlayer play s video clips and audio files that a re stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streamin g), 3 GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. Re alPlayer does not necessarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Sav ed clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streamin g media, select a web link that points to a clip, and select Pl ay ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: a n rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that poin ts to a RAM file. B efore the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automati cally to recon nect to the intern et access p oint. To adjust the v o lume duri ng playback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during playback, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playba ck or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connectin g to the streaming site stops, t he playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. 74 Free time
To download video clips from the web, select Option s > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Option s > Play in full screen . Full s creen increases the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspe ct ratio is mainta ined. Tip: To swi tch between the normal screen and full screen quickly, press 2 on the keypad. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, s elect Option s > Send . Selec t the sending method. To send a media clip inside a message , create a multimedia mess age, select a clip to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web link, select Optio n s > Clip de tails . Information may include for example the bit r ate or the internet link of a streaming file. To set on file protection for a media clip, select Option s > Clip deta ils > Status > Options > Change . File protection prevents others from changing a file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Op tions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . With Music player, you can pl ay music files, and create and listen to track lists. Music player su pports files with extensions su ch as MP3 and AAC. Listen to music Warning: List en to mus ic at a mo derate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage yo ur hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To select a musi c track, select Opti ons > Music library . All tracks lists all music on your device. To view sorted song s, select Album s , Artists, Genres , or Composers . To play t he track, s elect Options > Play . To p a use the playing, scroll to and press the scroll key. To fast-forward or rewind the track, scroll up or down and hold. To sel ect the prev ious or nex t trac k, scr oll up o r down . 75 Free time
To control the music volume, scroll right or left. To mute the volume, scroll left until the volume is muted. To stop a track, scroll to and press the scroll key. To play the m usic tr acks repeatedly, s elect Options > Loop . Select All to repeat all the tracks in the current folde r, One to repeat the selected t rack, or Off to s et off the repeating. To play music in random or der, select a folder and Optio ns > Rando m play . After you have added or re moved music files in the device, update your music library. Select Options > Update Musi c library . Music player sea rches the device memory for music files and updat es them to the music library. To view music track inform ation, select Options > View details . Track lists You can create a new track list and add tracks to it, or edit a saved track list. To create a new track list, se lect Options > Music library > Track list s > Opti ons > Ne w track list . To add a track to a track list, open th e track list, an d select Options > Add tracks . Music categories To view music categories, select Music library > Artists , Albums , Genres , or Composers . To play all music tracks from a subcategory, scroll to a subcategory, and s elect Options > Play . To view all tracks th at belong to a s ubcategor y, scroll to the subcategory, an d press the scroll key. To add all music tracks from a specific subcategory to a new, saved, or the current ly playing track list, select Optio ns > Add to track list . To delete all tracks from a category or subcategory, select Options > Delete . Preset frequency settings Select Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency setting you want to use, and select Optio ns > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Optio ns > Edi t , select a frequency band, and scro ll up or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your frequency adjust ment imme diately in the playback. To reset the frequency b ands to their original values, select Options > Reset to default s . To cr eate your own freq uency sett ing, select Options > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequ ency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands and s et the frequency on each ba nd. Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . 76 Free time
With Recorder, you can reco rd up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play the sound clip. Reco rder suppor ts the AMR file format. You can also pr ess the voice key to open the Recorder application. I f you have logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a p ush-to-talk key and does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pa use to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording T o l i s t e n t o t h e s o u n d c l i p t h a t y o u j u s t r e c o r d e d , s e l e c t Play . The progress bar di splays the playi ng time, position, and length of the clip. Select Stop to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you ch ange the default location. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the setti ngs are affected. To change the defau lt location of saved recording s, select Option s > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Recording q uality . Tip: Waveform files (.wav) are a more common audio file format, but adaptive multirate files (.amr) are smaller for co mparable sound quality. Instant messaging Select Menu > Connectivity > IM . Instant messag ing (IM) (network service) allows you to converse with other peop le using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service prov iders maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you regi ster to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. Con tact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs of services. For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the setti ngs manually. 77 Free time
Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Options > Settings > IM settin gs . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones. To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM conta cts, you must log into an instant messaging serv er. To add an I M server, select Optio ns > Sett ings > Server setti ngs > Servers . Ask your service provider for the correct set tings. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Server s ettings > Defau lt server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > Server s ettings > IM login ty pe . To establis h a connection between your device and the default server au tomatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the server when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into th e server in the IM main view by selecting Op tions > Log in . E n t e r y o u r u s e r I D a n d p a s s w o r d a t t h e p r o m p t . Y o u c a n obtain the user name, password, and other setti ngs to log in from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for I M users and us er IDs, sele ct IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phon e numbe r , a nd E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversation, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversa tions list with out closing the conversation, select Bac k . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new convers ation, select Options > New conversation . You can start a new con versation with a contact while you are insi de an active conversat ion. However, you cann ot have two activ e conversations with the same con tact. To insert an image to an i n stant message, select Optio ns > Send image , an d select the imag e you want to send. To save a convers ation participant to y our IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conv ersation view, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file tha t can be opened and viewed in the Notes application . IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . 78 Free time
To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scr oll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, a nd select Options > Send . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for whi ch you know the group ID, select Opt ions > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opti ons > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Sear ch . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To add an IM user to the group, select Optio ns > Add member . Select a user from your IM conta cts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Option s > Remove . To provide members with editing rights to the group, select Option s > Add editor . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit grou p settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. To remove editing rights from a group member, select Option s > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Option s > Ad d to banne d list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of th e user. To allow a banned user t o join the group, se lect Option s > Remove . Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking option s > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matching nam es appear in a list. To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user, select Option s > Unblock . To prevent receiving messag es from other IM users, select Option s > Block ne w contacts . Se lect the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Optio ns > Settings > IM s ettings and define the following settings: ⢠Use s creen na me â To change th e name that identifies you in IM groups, select Yes . ⢠Show my availability â Select whether you allow all other IM users or only your IM contacts to see when you are online. Select To no-one to hide your online status . ⢠Allow mes sages from â Select to receive instant messages from all other IM users, your IM co ntacts only, or not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invitations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling spee d â To decrease or increase the speed at which new messages a re displayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â Select to list your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. 79 Free time
⢠Availability reloading â To update the online status of your IM contacts a utomatically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline c ontacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time info â Select Yes to view the receiving or sending time of eac h mes sag e in a n IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, yo u can view, play, and in teract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the sc roll key. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash fi les saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the play back of so me flash files may appear uneven and slow due to their original settin gs. Change the quality setting of su ch files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your fla sh files, select Options > Organi se . Visual radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than t h e wireless dev ice antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the de vice for the FM radio to function prop erly. Listen to th e radio Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. C o n t i n u o u s e x p o s u r e t o h i g h v o l u m e m a y d a m a g e y o u r hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To searc h for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Option s > Manual tuning . To view av ailable stations based on location, select Optio ns > Station dire ctory (netwo rk service). 80 Free time
To save the curren t station to your st ation list, select Option s > Save st ation . To select a previously saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volume, us e the volume keys. To switch from headset use to listen ing to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To return to the sta ndby mode and leave the FM radio playing in the ba ckground, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availa bility and costs, and t o subscribe t o the service, contact your service provider. Before you ca n view visu al conten t, you mu st have an internet access point defined at Me nu > Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Access points . 1. To view availa ble visual co ntent for a tuned st ation, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID ha s not been save d for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to search f or it in the station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nearest to you from the station d i r e c t o r y . I f y o u r d e v i c e f i n d s a s t a t i o n t h a t m a t c h e s the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visu al content, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your saved st ations, select Option s > Stati ons . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available v isual cont ent for a st ation with th e Visual Radio service, sele ct Options > Station > Start visual service . To change th e station details , select Options > Station > Edit . Visual Radio settings Select Option s > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up tone â Select whether a tone is played when the application is st arted. ⢠Auto-start service â Select Yes to have the Visual Radio service st art automatically when you se lect a saved station tha t offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. Y ou do not need an access poi nt to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. ⢠Current region â Select the region you are currently located in. This se tting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was st arted. Push to talk Select Menu > Connectivity > PTT . 81 Free time
Push to talk (PTT ) (network service) provides direct voice communication connecte d with th e push of a key. With PTT, you can us e your dev ice as a wa lkie-talkie. You can use PTT to have a conv ersation with one per son or with a gro up of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you ca n call the channel to see if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start speaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen th rough the built-in loudspeaker. Users take tu rns responding to each other. Because only one user can talk at a time, the maximu m duration of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Opt ions > Settings and select User set tings to define your preferences for PT T, or Connecti on settings to change the conn ection details. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may also receive the sett ings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT servic e If you have set Applicatio n start-up on in User settings , PTT automa tically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT se rvice manually, select Opti ons > Switch PTT on . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep o nce or Silent , or there is an ongoing phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To make a PTT call, select Optio ns > PTT cont acts , select one or several contac ts from the li st, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. The display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards the microph one, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your ha nds. Press and hold the voice key the entire time you ar e talking. When you have finished talking, release th e key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT c all, press the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created calls , and a call. To make a PTT c all to a c ontact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To send a request to a contact to call you, select Optio ns > Send callback request . 82 Free time
To crea te a contact , select Options > Add to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, selec t Option s > PTT contacts . A list of nam es from the Contacts application is displayed with information about their login stat us. To call a selected contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, select several contacts and Option s > Make PTT group call . To send the contact a request to call you, select Option s > Send call back request . To answer a callback reques t, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice key. Create a PTT channel To crea te a channel, select Options > New channel > Create new . To register the channel to the PTT service, s elect Option s > Register . To join a channel, select th e channel you want to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a chan nel, select Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a chan nel, select Option s > Active members . To view more information ab out a selected user, select Option s > Contact details . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were active when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exit PTT, select Option s > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the background. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning Syst em (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellite s and their ground sta tions that monitor the operation of th e satellites. To use GPS, you need a compatible GPS receiver. Use Bluetooth con nectivity to connect to th e GPS receiver. To start usin g a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity, select Connectivit y > Bluetooth . A GPS terminal receives lo w-power radio signals from the satellites and meas ures the travel time of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. 83 Free time
The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible fo r its accura cy an d maint enance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS sa tellites made by the Uni ted States government and is subject to chang e with the Uni ted States Departme nt of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Pl an. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacle s, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver sh ould only be used ou tdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable different positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Positionin g > Posit ioning method s . About satelli te signals If yo ur de vice canno t find the s atel lite s igna l, cons ider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minu tes. Satellite status To check how many satellites y our device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signal s, select Menu > Tools > GPS data > Position > Optio ns > Satellite stat us . If yo ur device h as found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in th e satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. W hen your device has receive d enough data from the s atellite signal to ca lculate the coordinates of your loc ation, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculat e the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to contin ue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Positi oning . To use a specific position ing me thod to detect the location of your device, select P ositioning metho ds . To select a positionin g server, se lect Positioning server . 84 Free time
Nokia Maps Select Menu > Tools > Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one loca tion to another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by -turn n aviga tion service with voice guidance. When you use Maps for the firs t time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloading map information for your curren t location. To change the access point late r, select Op tions > Settings > Network > Default acce ss point . Download maps When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another coun try, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloa ding may involve the tra nsmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, cont act your service provider. You can view the amount of transferred da ta from the data counter (kB) shown on th e display. The cou nter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or se arc h for locations online. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select Optio ns > Settings > Network > Use network > Off . To receive a note when your device registers to a network outside your home cellular network, select Option s > Sett ings > Network > Roaming warning > On . Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. To adjust the size of the cache that is used for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Options > Settings > Network > Max. memory card use (%) . This option is availabl e only when a compatible memory card is inserted. Wh en the memory is full, the oldest map data is dele ted. The cache cannot be emptied. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader i s PC software that you can use to download and install maps for different countries from the internet to your devi ce or a compatible memory card. You can a lso use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, download it from www.nokia.com/ma ps, and install it to a compatible PC. You must use Nokia Maps before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to check the version of map data to be downloaded. 85 Free time
1. To download maps or voice guidance files with Nokia Map Loader, connect your device to t he PC with a compatible USB data cable. 2. Open Nokia M ap Loader in yo ur PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want to install to your device. Satell ite information The indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, the circles are yellow and the icon is blinking. When the device receives enough data from the satellites to calculat e the coordinates of your current location, the icon stops blinking and turns green. To check how many satellites y our device found and whether your device is rece iving satellite signals from the satellites, select Optio ns > Map options > Satellite info . If your device found satelli tes, a bar is shown for each satellite in the satellite information vi ew. The longer the bar, the stronger the s atellite signal. When your device has received enough data from th e satellite signal to calculate the coordi nates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must re ceive si gnals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continu e calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Browse map s The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that wa s saved from your la st session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you are in based on the info rmation the device receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not been downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Opti ons > Find place > GPS posit ion [0] . Your current location is indicated on the map with . To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch between the 2-D and 3-D views, select Optio ns > Map options > 2D/3D . To find a location, select Options > Find place . To use a location on the map, for example, as a sta rting point for a n earby search, t o plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the desired option. To define what kinds of p oints of interest are shown on the map, sel ect Options > Map options > Categories . 86 Free time
To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As image . The scr een shot is saved in Gallery. To save a location as a la ndmark, press the scroll key and select Save > As landmar k . To view saved landmarks, select Options > Find place > Landmark s . To send a landmark to a compatible device, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you se nd the landm ark in a text message, the i n formation is converted to plain text. To adjust the network, routing, and general setting s, select Option s > Settings . Find a place To view points of interest near your cur rent location or other locations on the map, select Opti ons > Find place > Nearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Option s > Find place > Keyword search , or start entering the first letters of t he name, and select Fi nd . To search for a location by ad dress, select Opti ons > Find place > By address . You must enter the city and country. To use an ad dress you have s aved to a co ntact card in Contacts, select Opt ions > Find p lace > By address > Optio ns > Select from con tacts . To view the search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To view a list of your p revious location s, select Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route 1. Scroll to a point on the ma p, press the scroll key, and select Route fro m . 2. Scroll to Select , and select Options > Sele ct . To adjust the routing settin gs, such as the mode of transportation, se lect Optio ns > Settings > Routing . 3. To select the desti n ation, scroll to To , and select Optio ns > Sele ct . 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options > Show route . The route is calculat ed using the selected routing settings. To view the itinerary ro ute on the map, select Option s > Show on map . To run a simulation of the route, select Options > Start simulation . Navigation To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance to use in M aps, selec t Options > Extra services > Add navig ation . The licence yo u purchase is device-specific and cannot be transferred from your device to another device. After purch asing the n avigat ion upgrade, the service is available through M aps. When you use nav igation for the first time, you are prompted to select the lang uage of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected language. To chan ge the language later, select Option s > Sett ings > General > Voice guidance . 87 Free time
To navigate to a desti nat ion using voice guidance, create a route in Maps , and select Option s > Start navig ation . You can also start navigat ion by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navig ate to . To discard the created route and use another route, select Options > Alternative route . To view only the next turn s and hide the map, se lect Optio ns > Map opti ons > Next turns . To stop navigation, select Options > Stop navig ation . Guides To purchase and download guides, select Opt ions > Extra services > Guides . The guides provide information about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of intere st. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. The licence you purchase is device-specifi c and cannot be transferred from your device to another device. To downlo ad a new gu ide to yo ur device, scroll to t he nearest guides or all guides tab, select the desired guide, and OK . The purchase pr ocess starts automatically. You ca n pay for the guides t hrough a credit card or have the amount charged to your phone bill, if supported by your cellular network service provider. To confirm the purchase, select OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purcha se through e-mai l, enter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . To browse a downloaded guide, scroll to the my guides tab, select a g uide and a s ubcategory, if available. GPS data Select Menu > Tools > GPS data . With GPS data, y ou can view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and tra ck distance. Select Navigation to view navigati ng information to your trip destination, Position to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your travelling information such as the distance and du ration you have travelled, and your average and maximum speeds. The application must rece iv e positioning information from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The tri p meter has limit e d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qu ality of GPS sig nals. Use GPS da ta To check the signal streng th of the satellites that provide the positioning information necessary for navigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite stat us . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destinat ion . You can also enter the destin ation latitude and longitude coordinates. 88 Free time
To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Options > Stop navigation . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Pos ition , and Options > Save positio n . To activate the trip meter, se lect Trip dist . > Option s > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Option s > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip again, select Trip dist. > Opti ons > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Option s > Sett ings > Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the posit ioning satellit es, select Option s > Sett ings > Altitude calibration . Landmarks Select Menu > Tools > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to geographic locations that you can save to your device for later use in different location-based services. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, selec t Optio ns > New landmark . Select Current posi tion to make a network request for the latitude and longit ude coordinates of your current location, Use map to select the lo cation from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary location information such as a name, category, address, lati tude, longitude, a nd altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Show on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Optio ns > Edi t > Option s and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landma rk to a group of similar landmark s. Select a categ ory to modify landmark inform ation such as a name, category, address , latitude, longit ude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve current positi on â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitude and longitude coo rdinates t o make a landmark of you r curre nt locatio n. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Land mark ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the landmark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices . ⢠Editin g options â Edit the p hone numbers and URL addresses assign ed to the landmark. ⢠Writing l anguage â Change the writing langua ge. Landmark categories You can see the landmark cate gories in two views: one lists catego ries that already contain landma rks, and the other li sts all the categories your de vice has. 89 Free time
To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, select Option s > Ed it categories > Options > New category . To move a landmark from one category to another, open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and Optio ns > Add to category . Select the old category to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or categories to which you wa nt to add the landma rk. Select Accept . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Messaging . Open a message that contain s a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Optio ns > Save . To forward the landma rk to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Optio ns > Show on map . To find out how to navigate t o the received landmark, select Options > Show route . 90 Free time
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corpora te intranet, or to another dev ice or computer. Fast downloading High-sp eed downlink packet acce ss (HS DPA, a lso cal led 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and th e device is connected t o a UMTS network th at supports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e- mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HS DPA connection is in dicated by . The icon may vary between regions. You can activat e or deactivate s upport for HSDP A in the device settings. For availability and s ubscription to data connect ion services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the down load speed; sending data to the netw ork, such a s messag es and e-mail, i s not affected. Nokia PC Suite You can install Nokia PC Suit e from the CD-ROM or from the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and W indows Vista. With Nokia PC Suite, yo u can make ba ckups, sync hronise your device with a compatible computer, move files between your device and a compatible computer, or use yo ur device as a modem. For more information about Nokia PC Suite, s ee the Nokia PC Suit e guide. Data cable Select Menu > Connectivity > USB . Using a U SB data cable, yo u can connect your device to a compatible comput er. Install N okia PC Suite to your computer before you use a cable connection, as Nokia PC Suite automatica lly installs the USB data cable driver to your computer. You can u se the Data transfer mode without installing the USB data cable drivers. Connect the cable to the USB connector of the device. To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable, select USB mode > PC Suite or Da ta transfer . 91 Connectivi ty
To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select As k on connection > Yes . Transfer data fro m a computer 1. Make sure that you have selected USB as a connection typ e in the Manage conn ections settings in Nokia PC Suite. 2. Insert a memory card to your device and connect the device to a compatible computer with t he USB data cable. 3. When the device asks which mode is used, select Data transfer . I n this m ode, y ou can see you r device as a removable hard drive in your co mputer. 4. End the connection from the computer (for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card. Infrared Do not point th e infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with ot her IR devices. This device is a Clas s 1 laser product . Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer da ta such as business cards, ca lendar notes, and media files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more important than the an gle or distance. 2. Sel ect Menu > Connectivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on th e other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Optio ns > Send > Via infrared . If the data tran sfer is not starte d within 1 minute after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through in frared are plac ed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devi ces away from each other breaks the connection, but the infr ared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivates. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology en ab les wireless connections between electronic devices wi thin a range o f 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluet ooth connection can be used to send images, videos, tex t, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that u s e Bluetooth technology. Since devices using Bluetooth t echnology communicate using radio wave s, your device and th e other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, al though the connection can 92 Connectivi ty
be subject to interference fro m obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetoot h connections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anoth er compatible device at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial-up Networking Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Handsfree Profile, Headset Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Generic Access Profile, Generic Audio/ Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distributi on Profile, and Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting B luetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine th eir compatibi lity with this device. Features us ing Bluet ooth technolo gy increase t he demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a uni que n ame t o mak e it easy to reco gni se if there are several Bluetoot h devices in the vicinity. 2. Select Bluetooth > On . 3. Select My phone's visib ility > Shown to all or Define perio d . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluet o oth technology. 4. Open the application wh ere the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item, and select Options > Send > Via Blueto oth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you ha ve sent data using B luetooth before, a list of the pr evious se arch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More d evices . 6. Select the devi ce with which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been establis hed, Sendin g data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store message s sent usin g Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visib ility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device o r Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Bluetoot h, a tone sounds, a nd you are asked if y o u want to accept the messa ge in which the data is in cluded. If you accept, t he mess age is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. 93 Connectivi ty
Tip: You can ac cess the files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite a nd some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fi xed p asscode. You need the p asscode only when you connect the devices for the first time. After pair ing , it is poss ible to authorise the connection. Pairing and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept the connection betw een paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. 1. Sel ect Options > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluetoot h devices within range. If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displa yed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same pa sscode mus t be entered to the other device as well. 3. Sel ect Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection at tempt is made. After pa iring, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a n ickname to the paired dev ice, select Optio ns > Assign shor t name . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device wh ose pair ing you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Op tions > Del ete all . If you a re currently connected to a devi ce and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immedia tely, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automa tically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and th e other device can be made without your knowledge. No separa te acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this stat us for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauth oris ed . To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or hea dse t, you need to pair your device with the enhancem ent. See the enhancement user guide for the passcod e and further instructions. To connect to the audio en hancemen t, switch on th e enhancement. Some aud io enhancements connect automati cally to yo ur device. Ot herwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . 94 Connectivi ty
Security tips When you a re not u sing Blu etooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you do not need a sep arate SIM card to access SIM card data an d connect to the GSM netw ork. To use the SIM access pro file, you need the follo wing: ⢠Compatible car kit device that suppor ts Blueto oth wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compat ible connected enhancement, such as a car ki t, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers progra mmed into yo ur device, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you must first leave the remo te SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unloc k it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profi le 1. Select Menu > Conne ctivity > Bl uetooth > Remote SIM mod e > On . 2. Activate Blu etooth in th e car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devic es. 5. To pair the devices , enter the Bluetooth pass code shown on the displa y of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the active user profile, the car kit searches automatically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your device, and automatic authorisati on is activated, the car kit automatically connects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignition. When you a ctivate th e remote SIM access pro file, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between your device and the ca r kit without separate acceptance or authoris ation, select Menu > Connectivity > Blu etoot h , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, p ress the scroll key, and enter t he Bluetooth passcode. When the device asks to make th e connection a utomatic, s elect Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM acce ss connec tion from your device, select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > Off . 95 Connectivi ty
Wireless LAN Some places, like France, ha ve restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local area network (WLAN ). To use WLAN, a network must be available in the location and your device must be connected to it. WLAN connections Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increas e the security of your wireless LAN connection. Usin g encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must create an internet access poin t in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the inte rnet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. T he active WLAN connection is ended when you end the da ta connection. You can a lso end the connect ion manually. See "Connection manager," p. 10 0 . You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. Y ou can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet ac cess point. When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still use WLAN, if availa ble. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN acce ss point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect y our device to another access point that belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you rema in within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can stay con nected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identi fies your device, for example to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN ava ilability, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. Tip: You can also sca n fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wiza rd helps you find and connect to a wireless LAN. When you op en the application, your device starts to scan for available WLAN s and lists them. 96 Connectivi ty
To update the list of available WL ANs, select Options > Refres h . To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, s croll to the desired network, and select Options > Start Web br owsing or Co nt. Web browsing . To disconnect the active connection to the W LAN, select Option s > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN , select Options > Details . To save the access point of the WLAN, select Options > Define access point . Always enable one of the av ailable encryption methods to increase the security of your WLAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your d ata. Use the wiz ard in the acti ve standby mode In the active standby mode, the WL AN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the availa ble options, scroll to the row showing the status , and press th e scroll key. Depending on the s tatus, you can st art the Web browser using a WLAN connection, disconnect from a WLAN, se arch for WLA Ns, or set the n etwork scanning on or off. If WLAN scannin g is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scanning off is displayed in the active standby mode. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs , scroll to the row showing th e status, and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll ke y, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN sca nning off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start Web browsing is selected, the WLAN wizard automati cally creates an access point for the selected WLAN. Th e access point can al so be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secu red WLAN, you a re asked to ente r the relevant passcodes. T o connect to a hidden network, yo u must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connecti on to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your s ervice p rovid er, and you may no t be able to create, edit, or remove them. 97 Connectivi ty
Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Sel ect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . 2. Sel ect Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Opti ons > Duplicate access point to us e the access point as a basis for the n ew one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packe t data . ⢠Access point name â Enter the name for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User n ame â Enter your user name if required by the service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Promp t passwor d â Select Yes to enter your password each time you log into a server or No to save the password in your device memory and automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case- sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authentica tion â Select Se cure to send your password always encryp ted, or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page wh en you use this access point. 4. After defining the settings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced settings or Back to save the setting s and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (G PRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Access points . After setting up a basic inte rnet access point for packet data (GP R S), sele ct Options > Advanced setti ngs , and define the follow ing advanced settings: ⢠Network type â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as th e internet protocol type. The internet protocol defi nes how data is trans ferred to an d from your devic e. ⢠Phone IP address â Enter the I P address of your device. Select Autom atic to have the network provide the device IP address. This setting is sho wn only if you select Network type > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresses, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided automatically. ⢠Proxy s e rver address â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide 98 Connectivi ty
additional security a nd speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Optio ns > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network name â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), th at is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To select the network from the WLANs in ra nge, select Search for networks . ⢠Netwo rk status â Select Hidden if the network you are connect ing to is hi dden or Public if it is not hidden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastr ucture , devices can communicate with each other and with wi red LAN devices through a WLAN acce ss point. If you select Ad-ho c , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLA N access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mu st select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected access), you must a lso configure the relevant additional settings. See the device help for more information. ⢠WLAN se curity setti ngs â Edit the security settings for the se lected securit y mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access point automatically, use the WLAN wiza rd. Selec t Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WL AN Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Option s > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel i s usually chosen automatically. To enter the ch annel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . 99 Connectivi ty
⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy server port number. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compati ble computer, you can u se your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use yo ur device as a modem ⢠You need an approp riate data communi cations software on your computer , such as Nokia P C Suite. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropriate network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriate drivers installed on your computer. You must install drivers for the cable connection, and you may need to install or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible computer using infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infr ared ports of the device and computer are directly facing each other with no obstacles between them. To connect your device to a computer using Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To act ivate Bluetooth in your device, select Menu > Connectivit y > Bluet ooth an d select Blueto oth > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to us e some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Acti ve data connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a conn ection from the list and Optio ns > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected network connection, select Optio ns > Disconnect . To end all active network connections simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs available within range, select Available WLAN netw orks . The available W LANs are listed with their network mo de (infrastructure or ad - hoc), signal strength, and network encrypti on 100 Connectivi ty
indicators, and whether your device has an active connection with the network. To view the details of a net work, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Option s > Define acce ss point . 101 Connectivi ty
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, an d take care of the security of th e devic e and i ts conten ts. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionalit y could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning . Lock the device Important: If the device has been lock ed, enter the lock code to activate the phone fu nction. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise th e number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock the device in the standby mode. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock code is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Me nu > Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Security > Phone and SI M card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alph abets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Allow remote lock > Yes . Enter the remote loc k messag e and confir m the messag e. The message m ust be at least 5 characters long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised acce ss. To set a password, se lect Optio ns > Set passwo rd . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive. The password is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, 102 Security and data m anagem ent
you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Option s > Remove passwo rd . When you remove the password, the data on th e memor y card is not protected again st unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory car d . Enter the p assword. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which cas e the card is unlocked and password removed. Formatting a memory card de stroys all data stored on the card. Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts > Op tion s > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling serv ice, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialli ng service. Contact your service provider for more information. When fixed dialling is acti vated, calls ma y be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your d evice. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Options > New SIM contact and enter the contact name a nd phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Contacts to copy the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country prefix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phon e numbers to which calls ar e allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Opt ions > Activate fixed d ialling . Yo u need your PIN2 code to activate and deactiv ate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To canc el the service, select Optio ns > Deactivate fix ed dialling . Tip: To send text messages to th e SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text mess age centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security > Certificate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. There are three different types of certificates: authority certificates, personal certificates, and se rve r certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certificate stored on your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct cert ific ate in your devi ce. Download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as an e-ma il attachment, or as a message sent through a Bluetooth or infrared conne ction. Certificates should be used when you connect to an online bank or a remote server to transfer confi dential 103 Security and data m anagem ent
information. They should also be used if you w ant to reduce the risk of viruse s or other malicious software, and to check the authentici ty of software when you download and install soft ware to your device. Tip: When you a dd a new ce rtificate, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, select View d etails . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. You may want to change th e trust sett ings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate no t valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the se lected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certific ate cannot be used. Contact th e certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a certificate means that you authoris e it to verify web pages, e-mail se rvers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to verify services and software. Impor tant: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and softw are installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; th e certificate manager must contain correct, authentic , or trusted certificates for increased security to be avai lable. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Exp ired certificate" or "Certifica te not valid yet" is shown, ev en if the certificate should be valid, check that th e current date and time in you r device are correct. To chang e the trust settings , select a certificat e and Optio ns > Trust settings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . Y ou cannot change the trus t settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Intern et â E-mail and graphics . ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Security > Security module . 104 Security and data m anagem ent
View and edit security modules To view or edit a security module, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security mo dule, select Option s > Security deta ils . To edit the PIN codes for the s ecurity module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digi tal signatures. You may not be able to change these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of th e security module. To delete the key store, select Key store , select the desired key store, and Op tions > Delete . You may no t be able to d elete the key sto re of all security modu les. Back up data I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o b a c k u p d e v i c e m e m o r y r e g u l a r l y to the memory card or a compa tible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory ca rd, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Option s > Back up ph one memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Option s > Restore f rom card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suite to back up data. Remote configuration Select Menu > T ools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receiv e configuratio n settings for your device. You may receive server profil es and different configuration settings from your service providers or company information manage ment department. Configuration set tings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device . The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usually started by the server when the de vice setti ngs need to be updated. To create a new server pr ofile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for th e configuration server. ⢠Serve r ID â Enter th e unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server p assword â Enter a password to identi fy your device to the server. ⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You 105 Security and data m anagem ent
can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start a connection . ⢠Host address â Enter the web address o f the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User na me â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. ⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuration â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes i f y o u d o n o t want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network authen tication â Select whet her to use http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. ⢠Network user name â Enter your user ID for the http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. ⢠Network password â Enter your password for the http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for you r device, se lect Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Application manager Select Menu > Installati ons > App. mgr. . You can install two typ es of applications and software on your devi ce: ⢠Applications and softwa re sp ecifically intended for your device or compatible wi th the Symbian operating system. These sof tware installation files have the extension .sis or .sisx. ⢠J2ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbian operating system. The Java application installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compat ible comp uter, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mai l attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installa tion, the device checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device ma y increase w hen you use these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installat ion file and install it immediately . Note, however, th at the connection runs in the background during th e installation. 106 Security and data m anagem ent
Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbia n Signe d or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download applications . Select the application and Option s > Install . To view the details of an inst alled software package, select the app lication and Optio n s > View details . To view the installation log, select Options > View log . A list shows what software has been installed and removed, and the date of th e installation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software package, use this list to find out which software package ma y be the cause of the problem. The information in th is list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, select Optio ns > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that con t ains the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you ma y no longer be able to open files created with that softwar e. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software p ackage may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installation s ettings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Delete â The software packag e installation file is deleted from the device afte r the installation. If you download software packages using the Web browser, this may help reduce the amount of storage space required. If you want to store the software package file for possible reinstalla tion, do not select this option, or make sure that you ha ve a copy of the software package file stored on a compat ible co mpute r or on a CD-ROM. ⢠Select language: â If the soft ware package contains several langua ge versions of the softwar e, select th e language version that yo u want t o insta ll. ⢠Type â Specify what kind of applications you want installed. You may ch oose to install only applications with vali dated certificates. This setting applies only to Symbian operating syst em applications (.sis or .sisx files). Java security settings To specify security se ttings for a Java applicat ion, select Option s > Sett ings . You can define which funct ions the Java app lication can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the protection domain of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an acce ss point that the application may use wh en ma king network connections. 107 Security and data m anagem ent
⢠Network access â Allow the application to create a data connection to the ne twork. ⢠Messaging â Allow the applicat ion to send messages. ⢠Applicatio n auto-sta rt â Allow the application to start autom atically. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection. ⢠Multimedia â Allow the application to use t he multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user d ata â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, con tacts, or any ot her personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the app lication to add personal data, such as en tries to Contacts. ⢠Positi oning â Allow the ap plication to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landmarks â Allow the application to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are promp ted to confirm the Java appl ication's access t o the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every t ime â Require the Java application to ask for your conf irmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â A llow the Java application to use the functionality with out your confirmation. The security se ttings help prote ct your dev ice against harmful Ja va applications th at may use the functions of your device wit hout your permission. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthines s of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java application from using the fu nctionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as images, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usa ge rights. The activat ion keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some acti vation keys you may listen to a music track only a limited number of ti mes. During one playback session you ma y rewind, fast-forward, or pause the track, but once you stop i t, you have u sed one of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital right s management (D RM) protected content comes with an as sociated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation key s and the content, use t he backup feature of ["Nokia PC Suite" or "Nokia Nseries PC Suite; insert the applicable one, and delete brackets]. Othe r transfer methods may not tra n sfer the activation keys wh ich need to be restored with the content for you to be able to con tinue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device me mory is formatted. You may also need to restore the acti vation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM pr otected content, both the activation keys a nd the content will be lost if th e device 108 Security and data m anagem ent
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activa tion keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invali d keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Optio ns > Key details . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activ ation key is valid , Activa tion key expire d , or Activation key not ye t valid . ⢠Conten t send ing â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allowed means that you cannot send the file to anoth er device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that t he file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the relate d file is not currently in the devi ce. To activate a key, go to the A ctivation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Opt ions > Ge t activation key . Establish a network connecti on at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where you can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desi red file, and select Option s > Delet e . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays a ll of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same ri ghts, th ey are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view from either the valid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > T ools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronis e your contacts, calendar entries, notes, or mail boxes with corresponding application s on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings are saved in a sy nchron isation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisat ion. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the applications with which you want to synchronise your device. You may receive the synchr onisation settings as a message from your service provider. The available applicati ons you can s ynchronise may va ry. Contact your service provider for more information. 109 Security and data m anagem ent
Create a synchronisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite synchronisation profile available in your device. You do not need to edit it if you synchronise your device wit h a computer usi ng Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Option s > New s ync profile and assign a name for the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the application s to synchronis e with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync pr ofile > Applicatio ns . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote database and Synchronisation type settings. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select New sync profile > Co nnection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ver sion â Select the Sync ML version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only availabl e if you select 1.2 as the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server du ring synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the synchronisation connec tion, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains th e database with which you want to synchronise your device. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the remote database server. ⢠User n ame â Ente r your user name to identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote da tabase server, select Yes . ⢠Accept al l sync requests â To have your device as k for your confirmation before accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network authent ication â To au thenticate y our device to the network befo re synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Download! Select Menu > Download! . 110 Security and data m anagem ent
With Download! (network service), you can browse, download, and install items, such as latest ap plications and related documents, to your device from the web. The items are categorised un der catalogs and folders provided by Nokia or independent service providers. Some items may be charg eable, but you can usually preview them free of charge. Download! uses your network services to access the most updated content. For informa tion on additional items available th rough Download!, cont act your service provider, or the supplier or manufacturer of the item. Only install and use appl ications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection again st harmful software. Select catalogs, folders, and items To update the Download! cont ent, select Opt ions > Refresh li st . To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, f or example, to view only items that you use frequently, select Option s > Hide . To make the items visible again, select Option s > Show all . To buy the selected item, select Option s > Buy . A submenu opens, where you can select the version of the item and view price information. To download an item that is free of charge, select Option s > Get . To view the details of the selected item, select Option s > View details . To return to the Download! main level, select Option s > Homepage . The available options may vary depending on your service provider, the select ed item, and the view you are in. Download! settings To change the Dow n load! settings, select Option s > Settings and from the following: ⢠Access point â Select an acce ss poin t to use to connect to the service provider 's server. ⢠Automati c open â Select whether you want the downloaded item or application to open automatically after the dow nload is completed. ⢠Preview c onfirmation â Select wheth er you want a confirmation query to be shown before previewing an item. ⢠Buy c onfir mation â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before buying an item. Software updates Nokia may produce soft ware updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You ma y be able to request these updates through the N okia Software Updater PC application. To upda te the device software, you need the Nokia Software Update r application an d a 111 Security and data m anagem ent
compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system , broadband internet a ccess, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and t o download the Nokia Software Updater applic ation, visit www .nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. Tip: To check the softwa re version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mo de. 112 Security and data m anagem ent
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these se ttings affects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change su ch settings. Select the setting you wan t to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two va lues , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Ge neral . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the se ttings for you r enhancements. ⢠Security â Defin e the security settings. ⢠Factory se ttings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positi oning â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based app lications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Personalisati on . Display settings To define the level of ligh t that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver ti me-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome not e / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the displa y dims after the last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . 113 Settings
Standby mode settings To select whether to use the acti ve standby, select Standby mo de > Activ e standby . To assign shortcuts for the scroll key and selection ke ys, select Standby mode > Shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the active sta ndby. To assign shortcuts to applications, select Standby mode > Standby apps . To select whether to show or hide the operator logo, select Standby mode > Operator logo > On or Off . To select the Inbox or the mailbox that is shown in the active standby, select Standby mode > Active standby ma ilbox . To select the plug-ins that are show n in the active standby, select Standby mode > Active standby plug-ins . You can, for example, see how many voice mails you have. Th e available plug- ins may vary. Tone s etting s To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, s elect To nes > Ringing type . You can also set the device to sound a ring ing tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ri nging tone, when someone from yo ur contac ts li st calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the various alert tones, select Tones > Message alert tone , E-ma il alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you r eceive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Keypad to nes . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . Language settings To set th e language u sed on the devi ce display, select Language > Phone language . To select the language in which you write notes and messages, sele ct Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predictive text input, select Lang uage > Predi ctive text . Notification light You can s et the noti fication lig ht on the cover o f your device to bli nk when y ou have r eceived a new mess age or when you have missed a phone call. To set the length of tim e you want the notificat ion light to blink, select Notificat ion light > Blink light for . To select of which events yo u want t o be notified, select Notifi cation l ight > N otified events . 114 Settings
Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Genera l > Dat e and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Ti me zone . To update the time, date, and time zone information automat ically (netwo rk servic e), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To select whether to use th e 12-hour or 24-hour clock system and w ith which symbol to se parate hours and minutes, s elect Time format and Time se parator . To determine th e date fo rmat and separator, select Date format and Date se parator . To define the clock typ e, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, select Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Ge neral > Enhancemen t . Common enhancement settings With most enhanc ements, you c an do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select Default profile . To let the device answer ph one calls automatically after 5 seconds when a n enhanc ement is attached, select Automati c answer > On . If the ringing type i s set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automati c answer i s disabled. To illuminate the devi ce while it is attached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . Security settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following se curity settings: ⢠Phone and SIM c ard â Adjus t the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate manage ment â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security mo dule â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accide ntal dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a code, enter the curren t code, then the new co de twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card ag ainst unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. After three 115 Settings
consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the S IM card again. To set the keypad to lock au tomatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad auto lock p eriod . To set a time-out af ter which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time- out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls ma y still be possi ble to the official emergency number programmed into your devi ce. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and bo th uppercase and lowerca se alphabets are possible. The device n otifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. To set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your device, select Phone an d SIM card > Lock if SIM card changed . The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the owners cards. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may ta ke a longer time to power on. Documents, con tact information, calendar entries, and file s are unaffected. Teleph one settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert," p. 37 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barrin g settings. See "Call barring," p. 38 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings . Call settings To display your phone num ber to the person you are calling, select Call > Se nd my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whethe r your caller ID is sent, select Set by ne twork . To display your net call address to th e person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be noti fied of a new incoming call wh ile you hav e a call in progre ss, select Cal l > Call waiting > Optio ns > Activ ate . To check if the function is active on the n etwork, select Options > Check s t atus . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet call a lert . You are no tified of missed net calls with a notification. 116 Settings
To set the default call type, s elect Call > Default call type and select Voice call if you make a GSM calls, or Internet call if you make net calls. To send a text message a u tomatically to the pers on who is calling you informing why you cannot answer the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the text for the message, select Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Pho ne > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automa tically between net works. To select the operator, select Operator se lectio n and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automati c to have the device select the network automa tically. To set the device to indica te when it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Co nnection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluet ooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See " Sen d and receive data with Bluetooth," p. 93 . ⢠USB â Edit the data c able settings. See "Data cabl e," p. 91 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you ma y not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine wh en packet data connections are used, and enter the acc ess point if you use your device as a modem for a comp uter. ⢠Wireless LAN â Determine if th e device displays an indicator when a WLAN is ava ilable, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP sett ings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data," p. 12 2 . Access points Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connecti on to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your s ervice p rovid er, and you may no t be able to create, edit, or remove them. 117 Settings
To create a new access point, select Options > New access poin t or select an existing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a ba sis for the new one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet da ta . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, it i s possible to have multiple data connections a ctive at the same time; access poin ts can sh are a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connecti on manager," p. 100 . To define the packet da ta settings, select Packet data connection an d select When available to register the device to the packet dat a network when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When ne eded to establish a packet data connection only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name p rovided by your service provider to use the device as a pack et data modem to your comp uter. These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displayed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WL ANs and up date the indica tor, select Scan for networks . This s etting is not available unless you select Show WLAN avai lability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settin gs manually, select Au tomatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum nu mber of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access point device issues a reques t to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measurem ents â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power sa ving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to sa ve the power in the device battery. Using the power savin g mechanism 118 Settings
enhances the battery performanc e but may weaken WLAN inter operability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Option s > Restore defaults . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Co nnection > Access points > Optio ns > New access point , o r select an access p oint and Opti ons > Edit . In the access point settings, se lect WLAN securi ty mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privac y (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not h ave the required WEP keys. When th e WEP security mode is in use, and your device rece ives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys , the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP ke y. Select WLAN s ecurity se ttings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settin gs â Edit th e settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-h oc network, a ll devices must use the same WEP ke y. Select WLAN se curity setting s > WEP key se ttin gs and from the following: ⢠WEP encr yption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCI I or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter th e WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN s ecurity se ttings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settin gs â If you select ed WPA/ WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared ke y â If you selected WPA /WPA2 > Pre-shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connec t. 119 Settings
WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN security setting s and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sele ct EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in sett ings â If you select WPA / WPA2 > EAP , select which E AP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shar ed key â If you selec t WPA/WPA2 > Pre-shar ed key , enter the shared private key that identifies y our device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentication protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wi reless devices and authentica tion servers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible th e use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-i ns currently installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settin gs, select Opt ions > New access point and define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Sel ect 802.1 x or WPA/WPA2 as the se curity mode. 3. Sel ect WLAN security settings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-in w hen you connect to a WLAN using the access point , select the desired plug-i n and Optio ns > Enable . The EAP p lug-ins enabled for us e with this a ccess point hav e a check ma rk next to them. To not use a plug-in, select Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Optio ns > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug -in sett ings, s elect Optio ns > Raise priorit y to attempt to us e the plug- in before other plug -ins when co nnecting to the network with the a ccess point, or Op tions > Lower priority to use this plug-i n for network authenti cation after attempting to use other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > SIP settings . 120 Settings
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and termin ating certain typ es of communication sess ions with one or more participants (network servi ce). Typical communication se ssions are video sharing an d net calls. SI P profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP pr ofile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use ex isting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select f rom the following: ⢠Profi le name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connecti on. ⢠Public user name â Enter you r user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use co mpression â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registratio n â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use s ecuri ty â Select if security negoti ation is used. ⢠Proxy s erver â Enter th e proxy server settings for this SIP profi le. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for thi s SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Option s > New SIP profi le or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its u sers used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy s erver address â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User n ame and Password â Enter y our user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow lo ose rout ing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Option s > New S IP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar serv er addres s â Enter the host name or IP address of the re gistrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User n ame and Password â Enter y our user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. 121 Settings
Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net ca ll profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Optio ns > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information mana gement containin g configuration setti ngs for trusted servers. These settings are automa tically saved in Configurations . You may receive configurat ion settings fo r access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and IM or synchronisation settings from trusted ser vers. To delete configurations for a trusted s erver, select Optio ns > Delet e . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted . Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. You r SIM card may not su pport the access point control service. Contact your service provider for more information. To restrict the packet da ta connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate a ccess point control or to edit the packet data access points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access p oint, create an emp ty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Options > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applicatio ns . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings . 122 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts ca n make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Active standb y mode Left selection key * Lock and unlock t he keypad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to op en your home page in the Web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles . 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. Y ou mus t first activ ate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image view er Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 123 Shortcuts
7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen siz e. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise . 1 Rotate count erclockwise. * Switch between th e full screen size and normal view . 124 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communication s. A digital syst em for mobile comm unicat ions wh ich aim s at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode w here two or more devices co nnect to ea ch other using WLAN directly withou t a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the s erver to you, to store information about y our visits to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that transl ates domain na mes such as ww w.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100. 124.195. Domain names are easier t o remember but this trans lation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual Tone M ulti-Frequency tones . The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. D TMF assign s a specific frequency , or tone, to each key s o that it can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF t ones allow y ou to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerise d telephony sy stems, and so on. EAP Extensible authenti cation protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authen tication servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is simi lar to GPRS, but it enables faster connection. For more information on the availability of EGPRS and data transfer speed, contact your ser vice provider. 125 Glossary
GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where in formation is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. A s GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fa st data transmission sp eeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, you cannot establish a GPRS connection , and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network s upports dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings hig h-s peed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavai lable because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertex t transfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used fo r accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructur e operating mode A WLAN network mode w here devices are connected to WLAN using a WLAN access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the cod e is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 t o 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain fu nctions suppo rted by the SIM card. The le ng th of the PI N2 code is 4 to 8 digits. 126 Glossary
POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 PIN Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session initiation pr otocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from th e web without dow n loading them first to your device. UMTS Universal mobile telecommunications system. UMTS is a 3G mobile communication system. Besides voice and data, UMT S enables audio an d video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GS M and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active a t the same time, and ac cess points can sh are a data connection. In the UMTS net work, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultaneously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPI N code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM car d used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, that you can send to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over internet protocol technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phon e calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual p rivate network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and serv ices, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communi cation. WEP Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an encryption method that encrypts da ta before it is transmitted in WLA N. WLAN Wireless local area network. 127 Glossary
WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 128 Glossary
Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any app roval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive range of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements fo r more details. For availability of the enhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rules about accessories an d enhancements ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect th e power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp an d pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that enhanc ements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installati on of any comp lex car enhancements must be made by qualif ied personnel only. Battery Important: Battery talk a nd standby times are es timates only and dep end on signal strength, n etwork conditions, features used, battery age an d condition, temperatures to which battery is expo sed, use in digital mode, and many othe r factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its standby ti me. Likewise, the amount of ti me that the device is turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk ti me. 129 Nokia or iginal enhan cements Type Talk time Standby BP-6MT Up to min Up to 3 h 0 6 1 3 d a y s
Troubleshooting To see frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12 345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If yo u forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press th e backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do imag es look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloure d, or bright dots appear on the screen ev ery time I switch o n my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may cont ain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find m y friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth conne ctivity? A: Check that both devi ces are co mpatible , have activated Bluetooth con nectivity, and are not in t he hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) a nd that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the devic es. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bl uetooth conne ction? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating B luetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connecti vity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a WLAN access point even though I know I'm with in its range? A: Check that the Offline pr ofile is not in use in your devi ce. The WLAN access p oint may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly a ccess networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access p oint for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access point is n ot on channels 12-13, as they cannot be as sociated with. 130 Troubleshootin g
Q: How do I switch WLAN off on my Nokia dev ice? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to conne ct, not connected to another access point, or n ot scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or s cans les s often, for available networks in the backgr ound. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To stop the back ground sc ans, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN n etworks and connect to WLA N networks as us ual. To increase the background scan inte rval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interval in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I b rowse the web ev en though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defin ed the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in the adva nced settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal quality of my WLA N connection? Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. > Active data connect ions > Optio ns > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or mode rate, you may encounter connection problems. Try ag ain closer to the access point. Q: Why do I hav e problems w ith the s ecurity mode? A: Check that you have config ured the security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the secu rity mode the network uses, select Menu > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Optio ns > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or E AP) , you have disabled all EA P types that are not needed, and all the EAP type sett ings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I se lect a con tact for my message ? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Contacts , and edit the contact ca rd. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happen ing? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia messaging centre. This note is shown if you ha ve set Multimedia ret rieval to Always automatic in the multimedia message settings. Check th at the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correct ly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 61 . Q: How ca n I end the data c onnecti on when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedi a message from the multimedia message centre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Mult imedia re trieval > Manual to have the multimedia messaging cen t re save 131 Troubleshootin g A:
messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia messa ge that you can retrieve in the multimedia me ssage centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messag ing. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Packet data > Packet dat a connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems con necting th e device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have t he latest version of Nokia PC Suite and that it is inst alled and running on y o ur compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support p ages of the Nokia web site. Q: How do I save batte ry power? A: Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background scans for WLAN. Se lect Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Show WLAN availab ility > Never . You can still manually scan for av ailable W LAN networks and connect to WLAN networks as usua l. ⢠Set the device to u se a pa cket data connection only if you start an appl ication or action th at needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connecti on > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > Tools > Maps > Option s > Se ttin gs > Network > Use n etwork > Off . ⢠Change the time-out after wh ich the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the appl ication, and press the backspace key to close the application. 132 Troubleshootin g
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged an d discharg ed hundreds of times, but it will eventu ally wear out. When the talk and standby times a r e noticeably shorte r than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia appro ved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this dev ice. If a replacement batt ery is being used for the firs t time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be neces sary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charg ing the battery. Unplug the charg er from the electrical plug an d the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely dis charged, it ma y take several minutes before the chargi ng indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circui t the b attery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) a n d negative (-) termin als of the batt ery. (These look like metal strips o n the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circuit ing the terminals may damage the battery or th e connecting object. Leaving the ba ttery in hot or cold places, su ch as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of th e battery. Alwa ys try to keep the battery between 15 ðC and 25 ðC (59ðF and 77ð F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when th e battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as the y may explode. Batteries may al so explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to com e in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or ey es immediately with wa ter, or seek medical help. 133 Battery information
Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia ba tteries for your safe ty. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your batt ery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest a uthorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticit y. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the p lace of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Origina l Enhancem ents log o when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm th at your Nokia batt ery with the hologram on t he label is an aut hentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Ta ke it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not a pproved by the manufacturer may be da ngerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate a n y approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about orig inal Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery . 134 Battery information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove th e battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dus ty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and elec tronic componen ts ca n be damaged . ⢠Do not store the device in hot area s. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the devi ce and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than a s instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. R ough handling can brea k internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog th e moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor , an d light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Una uthorized antennas, modifications , or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations go verning radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the batte ry. These suggestions appl y eq ually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to th e nearest authorized service facility for service. 135 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of th e reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ea r or when positioned at least 2. 2 centimeters (7/8 inches) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal an d should position the dev ice the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or mess ages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. En sure the above separation di stance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are ma gnetic. M etallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not plac e credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones , may in terfere w ith th e functionality of inadequa tely protected medical devices. Consult a physician or th e manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regu lati ons posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or h ealth care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of med ical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and an implanted medical device , such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices s hould: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. 136 Additional safety information
⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opp osite the medical device to minimize the potenti a l for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medica l device. If you have any questions a bout using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere wi th some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elec tronic systems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air b ag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may ap ply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, r e m e m b e r t h a t a i r b a g s i n f l a t e w i t h g r e a t f o r c e . D o n o t place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-veh icle wireless equipment is improperly installed and th e air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevice s in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosiv e atmosph ere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentia lly explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near g as pumps at ser vice stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blastin g operations are in progress. 137 Additional safety information
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosp here are often, but not always, clea rly marked. They include below deck on boat s, chemical tran sfer or storage facilities and areas where th e air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should check with the manufa ct urers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propan e or butane) to determine if this device ca n be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio si gnals, wireless networks , landline networks, and u ser-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You sh ould ne ver rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on , switch it on. Check for adequate signal st rength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emer gency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call ke y. If certain features are in use, you may first need t o turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commun ication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobi le devic e meets guidel ines for exp osure to radio wa ves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organi zation ICNIRP and include safety margins designe d to as sure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measuremen t known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guid elin es is 2.0 wa tts/ kilo gram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR a re conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all 138 Additional safety information
tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the m aximum va lue because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the netw ork. That amount chang es depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base sta t ion. The hi ghest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidel ines for use of the device at the ear is 1.40 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements an d the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.c om. 139 Additional safety information
MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statut ory) rights under your applicable nation al laws relating to the sale of consu mer prod ucts. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in th e sales package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrant s to you th at during the warranty period Nokia or a Nokia authorized service company will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in materials, desig n and workmanship free of charge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacin g the Product in accordance with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purcha sed the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty period The warranty period starts at the time of Product's original purchase by the first end-user. The Produc t may consist of several different parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different Warranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months fo r the mobile device and accessories (whether included in the mobile device sales package or sold se p arately) other than the consuma ble parts and ac cessor ies listed in (b) and (c) below ; b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts and accessories: batter ies, chargers, de sk stands, headsets , cables and covers ; and c ) n i n e t y ( 9 0 ) d a y s f o r t h e m e d i a o n w h i c h a n y s o f t w a r e is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subseq uent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of repa ir, wh ichev er is long er. 140 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
How to get warranty service If you wish to make a claim u nder the Limited Warranty, you may call the No kia call center (w here this is available and please note national rates a pply to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product o r the affected part (if it is not the en tire Product ) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location. Information about Nokia care centers, N okia designated service locations and Nokia call centers can be found at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location before the expiry of the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or a ffected part thereto), b) the legible and unmodified original proof of purchase, which clearly indicates th e name and address of the seller, the date and pla ce of purchase, the produ ct type and the IMEI or other serial number. This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subseq uen t purchaser/end-user. What is not covered? 1. This Limited Warranty do es not cover user manuals or any third party software, settings, content, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, a ssembly, shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination wi th any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear and tear (includin g, without limitation, w ear and tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by roug h handling (including, without lim itation, defects caused b y sharp item s, by bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misus e of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the Prod uct's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 3. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by th e fact that the Product wa s used with, or connected to, a product, accessories, software and/or se rvice not manufactured, supplied or authorized by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third part y's unauthorised a ccess to services, other accounts , computer systems or networks. This unauthoris ed access can take place through hacking, passw ord-mining or through a variety of other means. 4. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the ba ttery enclosure or the 141 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery ha s been used in equipment other than those for wh ic h it has been specified. 5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an authorized service centre, if it is repaired using unauthorised spare part s or if the ProductâÂÂs seri al number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, er ased, defaced, altered or are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to moisture, to da mpness or to extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to rapid changes in such co nditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chemical produc ts. Other important notices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellular and/or ot her network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility un der this warranty for the operation, availa bility, cove rage, services or range of the cellular or other network or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may ha ve been added to lock the product to a specific network or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or f or the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make backup copies or keep written records of all import ant content and da ta stored in your Product, be cause content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manne r consiste nt with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLimit ation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by a pplicable law(s), shall not under any circumstan ces be liable, either expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting fr om loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacement of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment t hat Nokia has replace d shall become the prop erty of Nokia. If the returned P roduct is fo und not to be covered by the terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia and its authorized service companies reserve the right to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or recond itioned. Your Product may c ontain country specific elements, including software. If the Pr oduct has been re- exported from its original destination country to another country, the Product may contain country specific elements that are not consid ered to be a defect under this Limited Warrant y. 142 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclus ive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However, this Limit ed Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (s tatutory) rights under the appli c able national laws or ii) any of your rig hts aga inst th e seller of the Product. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non- mandatory) st atutory, co ntract ual, in tort or otherwise, including, without limitat ion, and where permitted by applicable law, any implie d conditions, w arranties or other terms as to satisfacto ry quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent perm itted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of busine ss, loss of contracts, loss of reve nues or loss of anticipated savings, in creased costs or expenses or for any indirect loss or damage, conseque ntial loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by applicable law, NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Produ ct. The above li mitations shall not ap ply to deat h or personal injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. Statutory obligations This Limit ed Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions th at imply warranties or conditions into this Li mited Warra nty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited ex tent. If such statutory provisions apply, t o the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to , in the case of goods: the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods, the repair of the g oods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of service s: the supplying of the services again or the pa yment of the cost of having the services supplied again. Note: Your Produ ct is a sophi sticated electronic device. Nokia stron gly encourages you to familiarise yourself with the user guide and instructions provided with and for the Product. Please also n ote that the Product might con tain high precision displays, camera lenses and other su ch parts, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if no t handled very carefully. All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without notice. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02150 Espoo Finland 143 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
Index Symbols/Numerics 3-D ringing tones 26 802.1x security setti ngs 1 1 9 A access points creating 117 activation keys 108 Active note s 6 4 settings 64 activ e stan dby 21 alarm clock 70 alert to nes 114 altitude calibration 88 animated screen s aver 25 antennas 31 application s ettings 122 applicatio ns common actions 22 installing 107 modifying installations 107 shortcuts 114 attachments e-mail 53 multimedia messa ges 58 sound clips 59 audio files detai ls 75 sending 75 audio them es 26 autolock period 11 5 B background image 25 backing up data 105 battery charge level 17 charging 14 inserting 13 blogs 49 Bluetooth authorising devices 94 pairing 94 passcode 94 receiving data 93 security 95 sending data 93 bookmarks 49 browsi ng offline 49 web 48 business cards 44 sending 4 4 C cable 91 cache emptying 49 Calculator 65 Calendar adding received entries 45 creating entries 45 day view 47 deleting entries 45 month view 47 sending entries 45 settings 47 to-do view 47 week view 47 calendar key 28 call barring 38 net calls 38 call divert 37 caller ID 1 16 calls answering 33 barring net calls 38 call waiting 116 caller ID 116 conference call 34 fax calls 34 fixed dialling 44, 103 making 33 making a call from Log 42 making a net ca ll 37 muting the ringing tone 33 net call alert 116 PTT 82 rejecting 33 144 Index
rejecting wi th text message 116 selecting ty pe 11 6 settings 116 speed dialling 37 voice commands 40 voice dialling 40 voic e mail 39 camera capturing images 72 recording video clips 72 settings 73 car kit remote SIM access 95 cell broadcast 60 settings 63 certificates details 104 settings 104 charging the battery 14 Clock alarms 70 settings 70 world cloc k 70 conference calls 34 configuration messages 122 connection methods Bluetooth 93 data cable 91 infrared 92 modem 100 connections ending 100 GPRS settings 98 WLAN settin gs 99 connectors 15 contacts adding thumbnails 4 2 copying information 42 creating 42 groups 43 ringing tones 43 searching 42 SIM card contac ts 42 SIM directory 44 voice tags 42 contacts key 2 7 converting currencies 68 measurements 68 currency conversions 68 customer service 19 D date settings 115 destination removing 88 setting 88 Device manager 105 display changing the look 25 indicators 17 settings 113 Download! catalogs 111 settings 111 DTMF tones 39 E e-mail automatic retrieval settings 63 connecting to mailbox 5 3 connection sett ings 62 creating folders 54 deleting 54 replying 53 retrieval settings 6 2 sending 54 setting up 52 user settings 62 writing 54 e-mail key 28 EAP plug-in settings 120 using an EAP plug-in 120 ending internet connections 49 network connections 100 enhancement s remote SIM access 95 settings 115 equaliser 76 F fax calls 34 feeds 49 File manager 66 files downloading 73 flash files 80 sending 66 145 Index
fixed dialli ng 44, 103 free memo ry 28 G Gallery 73 Genuin e enhanceme nts 129 GPRS access point settings 98 advanced access point settings 98 settings 118 H heads et connecti ng 16 home k ey 27 HSDPA (high-speed downlin k packet access) 91 I IM application se ttings 79 blocking users 79 groups 78 settings 78 starting a convers ation 7 8 images adding to conta cts 74 displa y backgrou nd 74 rotating 73 sending 74 zooming 73 indicators 17 infrared 92 insert ing battery 13 memory card 29 SIM card 13 installation log 107 installin g applications 107 intern et 48 ending connections 49 internet calls 3 7 J jad files 107 jar files 107 Java applications 107 K key store 1 05 keyguard 17 keypad lock settings 115 locking 17 tones 114 keys 15 activation keys 108 shortcuts 114 WEP keys 119 L landmarks categories 89 creating 89 editing 89 receiving 9 0 sending 90 lang uage changing 31 settings 114 lock code 102, 115 locking device 10 2 device autolock 115 keypad 17, 115 Log 4 1 adding numbers to Contacts 41 deleting 41 making a call 42 sending mess ages 42 settings 42 transfer log 24 logos operator logo 114 welcome logo 113 M mailboxe s connecting 53 creating 52 maintenance services 19 making a call 33 measureme nts converting 68 measuring syst em changing 88 memory 28 memory card backing up data 105 formatting 29 146 Index
inserting 29 locking 102 microSD 29 passwords 102 setting passw ord 29, 66 unlocking 29 menu 2 2 message reader 51 selecting voice 51 messages 50 call rejection messages 116 cell broadcast settings 63 configuration messa ges 122 other settings 63 sending sound clips 59 service messages 59 text message se ttings 60 Messaging folders 50, 51 microSD 29 modem 1 00 multimedi a messages attachments 58 creating 56 creating presentations 57 forwarding 58 receiving 5 7 replying to 57 sending 5 6 sending options 59 settings 61 multitasking 28 Music player listening to music 75 music categori es 76 track lists 76 N net calls 37 alert sett ings 116 barring 38 connecting 36 making a call 37 profiles 36, 122 settings 122 network settings 117 Nokia Maps 85 Nokia PC Suite 91 Nokia support and contact information 19 Nokia Team Suite 67 action bar settings 67 editing teams 67 settings 67 Notes 71 notification light 114 O operator logo 114 selecting 117 original sett ings 116 P packet data access point setting s 98 advanc ed access point settings 98 restricting 122 settings 118 pairing devices 94 passcode 94 passwords memory card password 29, 66 PC Suite 91 PDF reader 69 personalisat ion 25 changing language 114 display 113 standby modes 114 tones 114 picture messages forwarding 56 viewing 55 PIN co de changing 115 playing messages 51 recordings 7 7 video and audio 74 positi oning settings 84 predictiv e text i nput 31, 114 presentat ions 57 printer s ettings 70 printi ng 69 profil es creating 24 customising 24, 25 net call profile 36, 122 selecting ringing tones 25 147 Index
PTT contacts 83 created calls 82 creating a channel 83 exiting 83 logging in 82 making a call 82 settings 82 Q Quickoffice 66 R radio listening to 80 saved stations 81 settings 81 viewing visual content 81 RealPlayer playing media clips 74 sending files 7 5 settings 75 viewing clip details 75 recorder playing recordings 77 recording a sound clip 7 7 settings 77 recording sound clips 77 video clips 72 remote configuratio n 10 5 remote lock 102 remote synchron isation 110 repair services 19 restoring or iginal settings 116 ringing tones 43, 114 3-D 26 in profiles 25 vibrating aler t 1 14 S satellite signal strength 88 saving current position 88 files 22 settings 22 screen saver 25, 113 Search application 65 search resu lts 6 5 searching available WLANs 100 contacts 42 security Bluetooth 95 device and SIM card 115 Java app lication 107 memory card 102 security modul e 1 05 sending files 22, 66 using Bluetooth 93 videos 35 service command s 59 service mes sages 59 settings 63 session initiat ion protocol See SIP settings Active notes 64 advanced WLAN 118 application installations 107 applications 122 Calendar 47 calls 116 camera 73 cell broadcast 63 certificate 104 clock 70 date 115 display 113 Download! application 111 e-mail connection 62 e-mail retrieval 63 e-mail user 62 EAP plug-ins 120 enhancements 115 GPRS 98, 118 IM 78 Java applicat ion security 107 keypad lock 115 language 114 Log 42 multimedia messages 61 net call 122 network 117 Nokia Team Suit e 67 packet data 118 positioning 84 printer 70 PTT 82 radio 81 RealPlayer 75 recorder 77 restoring 116 148 Index
service messages 63 SIP 120 standby mode 114 text messages 60 time 115 tones 114 voice commands 41 Web 49 WEP security 119 WLAN 118 WLAN access point 9 9 WLAN security 119 Settin gs wiza rd 20 shortcuts 123 applications 114 keys 114 signal streng th 17 SIM access profile 95 SIM card inserting 13 text messages 55 SIM change lock 115 SIM directory 44 SIP creating profiles 120 editing profiles 121 editing proxy servers 121 editing registration servers 121 settings 120 sis files 107 sisx files 107 software packages installation settings 107 installing 107 softw are update 111 sound clips recording 77 sending 59 Speech 51 speed dialling 37 standby modes active sta ndby 21 basic standby mode 21 settings 114 support inf ormation 19 switching device on and off 16 Symbian appl ications 107 synchronisation 24 settings 110 synchronisation profiles 110 synchronising applications 110 T tabs 22 text changing size 113 letter mode 30 number mode 30 predictive input 31 traditional input 30 text mes sages messages on SIM card 55 sending 54 sending options 55 settings 60 writing 54 themes audio 26 changing 25 downloading 26 time settings 115 to-do entr ies 46 tones 114 settings 114 track lists 76 tradition al text inpu t 30 Transfer log 2 4 transferrin g data 23 trip destinat ion 88 trip met er 88 troublesh ooting 130 U UPIN co de changing 115 USB da ta cable 91 V vibrating aler t 114 video ca lls making a call 34 switching to voice call 34 video clip s 72 details 75 playing 74 sending 75 video sh aring 35 receiving invitations 35 Voice aid 39 149 Index
voice commands changin g profiles 41 launching an application 40 settings 41 voice mail calling 39 changin g number 39 voice o ver IP 37 VoIP 37 volume 27 W wallpaper 74 warning tones 114 Web connection security 48 settings 49 weblogs 49 Welcome application 20 welcome note 113 WEP keys 119 security setti ngs 119 WLAN 802.1x security settings 119 access point settings 99 access points 96 advanced access point settings 99 advanced settings 118 availability 96 MAC address 96, 118 searching for networks 100 security setti ngs 119 settings 118 WEP keys 119 WPA security se ttings 120 WLAN wizard 9 6 world cl ock 70 WPA security se ttings 120 writing language 31 Z Zip manager 68 150 Index
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care web suppo rt provides you wit h more info rmation on our on line services. INTERACTIV E DEMONSTRATIONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem o nstrati ons give step-by- step instructions on using your phone. USERâÂÂS GUIDE The online UserâÂÂs Guide contains detailed in formation on your phone. Remembe r to check regularly for updates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone with software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your phone and PC s o you can manage your calendar, contacts, music and images, while other applications complement its use. SETTINGS Certain phone funct ions, such as multimed ia messaging, mobile browsing and email*, may require settings before you can use th em. Ha ve them sent to your phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones. INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATI ONS SOFTWARE USERâÂÂS GUIDE SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps you prepare your phone for use. Fa miliarise yourself wi th phone functions and features b y referring t o the Guides and Demos section at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you synchronise your calendar and contacts. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE? Get more out of your phone with downl o ads from the So ft ware section at www.nokia-asia .com/software . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON Q UESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on yo ur phone and other Nokia products and services. HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS? Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exclusive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communication s" for upcoming e vents. Should you still require furthe r assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/contactus . For additional informati on on repair services, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own country site for more details: Australia and New Zealand www.nokia.com.au/support Malaysia www.nokia.com.my /support India www.nokia.co.in/support Philippine s www.noki a.com.ph/support Indonesia www.nokia.co.id/support Singapore www.nokia.com.sg/support Japan www.nokia.co.jp/support Th ailand www.nokia.co.th/support If your country is not lis ted above, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support .
DECLARATION O F CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION d eclares tha t this RM-244 product is in compliance with the es sential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 199 9/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/decla ration_of_conformity/. é 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproducti on, transfer, d istributi on, or storage of p art or all of the content s in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nok ia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, No kia Origin al Enhancements logos, Eseries, E51, and Visual Radio are t radem arks or registered trademarks of Noki a Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of N okia Corporation. Other product and company n ames mentio ned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their respective ow ners. This product is li censed under the MP EG-4 V isual Patent Portfo lio License (i) for personal and no ncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a person al and noncommercial activity a nd (ii) fo r use in connect ion with MPEG- 4 video prov ided by a licensed video pr ovider. No lice nse is granted or shall be implied for an y other use . Additi onal informatio n, including that related to promotional, interna l, and commercial uses, may be ob tained fro m MPEG LA, LLC. See http://w ww.mpegla. com. This product includes so ftware licensed fr om Symbian So ftware Ltd é 1998-200 7. Symb ian and Symb ian OS are trademar ks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input soft ware Copyright é 19 97-2007. Tegic Com munications, Inc. Al l righ ts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are tr ademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. Portions of th e Nokia Maps software are co pyright é 1996-2002 The FreeType Project. Al l rights reserved. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing develop ment. Nokia reserves th e right to make cha nges and improvemen ts to any of the product s describ ed in th is document without prior notice. TO THE MAX IMUM EXT ENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICA BLE LAW, UN DER NO CI RCUMSTAN CES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONS IBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOM E OR ANY SPECIA L, INC IDENTA L, CONSEQUENT IAL OR INDIRECT DA MAGES HOWSO EVER CAUSED. THE CO NTENTS OF THI S DOCU MENT A RE PROVIDE D "AS IS". E XCEPT A S REQ UIRED B Y APP LICABL E LAW, N O WARR ANTI ES OF AN Y KIND, E ITHER E XP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, T H E IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY A ND FITNESS FOR A P ARTICULAR PUR POSE, ARE MA D E IN RELA TION TO TH E ACCU RACY, RELIA BILIT Y OR CON TE NTS OF T HIS DO CUMEN T. NOKI A RESE RVES THE RI GHT TO R EVISE THIS DO CUMENT OR WITH DRAW IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PR IOR NOTIC E.
The availability of particular products an d applications for these pro ducts ma y vary by region. Pleas e check with y our Nokia de aler f or details, an d availab ility of language o ptions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities, techn ology or software subject to export laws and regu lations from the US and other countr ies. Di versi on contrary to law is prohibited. Model number: E51-1
Contents For yo ur s afe ty .. ......... ......... ......... .......... ...10 About your device............................................ .............11 Network services................................ ...........................11 Enh ance me nts , bat ter ies , an d ch arg ers .....................12 Get st ar ted ........ ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ..13 Insert the SIM card and battery................. ............ ......13 Charge the battery..................................... ...................14 Keys and parts................................................... ............15 Connect the headset............................................ .........16 Attach the wrist strap...................................................16 First start-up................................................................. .16 Lock the keys.......................................... .......................1 7 Display indicators. .............................. ...........................17 Nok ia s uppo rt a nd cont act in form ati on.. .......... ......... 19 Your Nokia E51........................ ...................20 Welcome.................................. ............................ ..........20 Settings wizard...................... ........... ............ ............ ....20 Standby modes............ ......................... ......................... 21 Active standby......................... ................ ...................2 1 Standby...................... ................ ................ .................21 Menu................ ............................... ...................... ..........22 Com mon a cti ons in s eve ral ap pli ca tion s...... .......... ....22 Transfer................................................. .........................23 Transfer content between devices......... ..... ..... ...... ..23 View transfer log........................................................24 Synchronise, retrieve, and send data............ ...........2 4 Personalisation.. ................. ................. ........... ...............24 Profiles........... ............... ............ ................ ............... ....24 Select ringing ton es.................. ............... ............... ...25 Customise profiles............................... .......................25 Change the di splay theme.........................................25 Download a theme.................... ....................... ..........26 Change audio themes.................................... ............26 3-D ringing tones............. .......... ......... ............ ......... ..26 Volume control................................................... ...........27 One-touch keys.................. .......................... ..................27 Home key................... ................ ................ .................2 7 Contacts key............................ ....................................27 Calendar key........ ................ ................ ................ ........28 E-mail key............ ............................. ........................... 28 Multitasking............. ................................................ ......28 Memory........................................ ........................ ..........28 Free memory................. .................... ..................... .....28 Memory card...............................................................29 MicroSD.....................................................................29 Insert the memory ca rd................. ...................... ...29 Use a memory card........ ...................... ....................29 Eject the memory card....................................... .....30 Write text................................................. ......................30 Traditional text in put............ ................ ............. ........30 Predictive text input................... ............. .......... ........3 1 Cha nge th e wri tin g la ngu ag e....... .......... ....... ......... ..31 Antennas........................................................................31 Further information. .....................................................32 Busi ness c omm unic ati ons ................. ........33 Telephone......................................................................33 Voice calls................. .............................. .....................33 Contents
Answer a call............................................................33 Make a call.............................. ..................................33 Make a conference call............................................34 Fax calls............................... ..................... ................34 Video calls................................................ ...................34 Make a video call............ .......... ......... .......... .......... ..34 Share a video.................. ............ ............... ............ ..35 Rec eiv e a vid eo sh ar ing inv ita tio n........................35 Net calls................................ .......................................35 Create a net call profile.......................................... .36 Con nec t to the net cal l se rvi ce.. .......... ........ ........... 36 Make net calls........ ............... ................ ........... .........37 Net call service sett ings............ ......... ......... ............37 Speed dialling.............................................................37 Call divert......................... ................ ................. ..........37 Call barring................ ............................... ...................38 Bar net ca lls........... ................. ........... ................ ..........38 Send DTMF tones........... .............. ........... .............. ......39 Voice mail............ ...................... ...................... ............39 Voice aid................ ..................... .................... ................39 Voice commands.......................................... .................40 Make a call............ .................... ................ ...................40 Launch an ap plication........ ................. ................... ....40 Change profiles..... ............................................. .........41 Voice command settings............... ......... ........ ......... ..41 Log................................. ...................................... ...........41 Call and data registers....................... .............. ..........41 Monitor all commun ications........... ........... ........ .......41 Call and send messages from Log ............... ..............42 Log settings ......... ................... ............. .............. .........42 Contacts..... ................... ................... .................... ...........42 Copy contacts between SIM and device memory.......................................................................42 Manage contacts. ................ ............ ................. ...........42 Manage contact groups......................... ........... .........43 Add ri ngi ng t one s fo r cont ac ts...... ....... .......... .......... 43 Send business ca rds....................................... ............44 Mana ge r ece ive d b usi nes s car ds. ............................. 44 SIM directory...............................................................44 Calendar............................................ .............................45 Create calendar entries ..............................................45 Create a meeting entry......................................... .....46 To-do entries............... ................ ............ ............ .......46 Calendar views..... ............ .................. .................. .......46 Work in different views............... ........ ....... ........ ....47 Month view..................... ............ ........... ................ ..47 Week view...................... ..........................................47 Day view...................................................................47 To-do view..................... .............. ................ ............47 Calendar settin gs..................... .................... ...............47 Web.................................... .............................. ..............48 Connection security........... ........................ .................48 Browse the web........... ............... ................ ............... .48 Bookmarks............................................................ ......49 Clear the cache.............. .................. .................. ..........49 Feeds and blogs................. .............................. ...........49 End a connection........................................................49 Web settings............................................... ................49 Messaging................ ........... ......... ........... ...50 Messaging folders........................ ............... ............... ...50 Organise messages................................... ................. ...51 Message reader............................ ............ .................... .51 Speech............................................................................51 Edit the voice properties............. ...... ....... ....... ...... ....51 E-mail mess ages............. .......................... .....................52 Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide .............52 Connect to a remote mailbox... ................... ..............53 Contents
Read and reply to e-mail ......... ......... .......... ............. ..53 Write and send e-mail................... .......... ............ ......54 Delete messa ges................. ............................ ............54 Subfolders in your remote e-mail...... ....................... 54 Text messages...............................................................54 Write and send text messages................... ...............54 Sending options for tex t messages ........ ............ ......55 Text messages on the S IM card.................................55 View picture me ssages............................ ..................55 Forward picture messages..................... ............ .......56 Multimedia messages...................................................56 Cre ate an d sen d mu lti med ia m ess age s.............. .....56 Rec eiv e a nd r epl y to m ult im edi a mes sag es......... ...57 Create presentations..... ........................................ .....57 View presentations.............................. ................ ......58 Vie w an d sa ve m ult ime dia att ach me nts.................58 Forward a multimedia messag e............... ................5 8 Send a sound clip.................... ............... .......... ..........5 9 Sending options for mu ltimedia messages.............59 Special messag e types..................................................59 Service messages.. ............... ............... ............... .........59 Send service comman ds.............. ........... .......... .........59 Cell broadcast...................................... ...................... ....60 Messaging s ettings.................... ........... .............. ..........6 0 Text message se ttings..................... ............... ...........60 Multimedia message settin gs........... ......... ......... ......61 E-mail account settings................. ....... .......... ......... ..62 Connection settin gs.............. ................... ................62 User settings........................... .................. ...............62 Retrieval settings........ ................ ..................... ........62 Automatic retrieval se ttings............. ......................63 Service message set tings........ ...... ...... ...... ...... ....... ...63 Cell broadcast settings ................................... ............63 Other settings.............................................................63 Noki a O ffi ce T ool s..... .......... ...... .......... .......6 4 Active notes................................................ ...................64 Create and edit notes....... ............................. .............64 Settings for Active notes. .................... .................... ...64 Search........................ ............................. ....................... .65 Search for information............. ...... ....... .......... ...... ....65 Search results.. ................ ................ ............... .............65 Calculator............................................................. ..........65 File manager....... ................................ ...........................66 Quickoffice......................................... ............................66 Work with files...................... ............... ................... ...66 Nokia Team suite........................... .............. .................6 6 Work with teams...... .................................................. 67 Edit teams.................................................. .................67 Nokia Team Suit e settings....... ................... ...............67 Action bar settings .............................. .......................67 Converter.............. .................. .............. .................. ........68 Convert measu rements............ ...................... ............68 Set bas e c urre ncy and exc han ge rate ............... .......68 Zip manager....... .................. .............. .................. ..........68 PDF reader................ ................... ............... .................... 69 Printing................................................. .........................6 9 Print files.....................................................................69 Printing options................... .......... ......... ............ .......69 Printer settings............... ....................................... .....70 Clock................................ ................... ........................ ....70 Alarm clock................. .............. ....................... ............70 World clock................ .............. .............. .............. .......70 Clock settings................ ..............................................70 Notes.......................................... ....................................71 Write and send not es............... ............................ ......71 Free time............................................. .......72 Camera...................................... ........................... ..........72 Contents
Capture an image.......................................................72 Record a video clip......................................... ............72 Camera settings. ........................................ .................73 Gallery................... ......................... ................ ................73 Wor k wit h me dia fi les a nd fo lde rs. ........ ......... ......... 73 View images.... ............... ........... ............... ............... ....73 Manage image files....................................................74 RealPlayer............................................. ........................ .74 Play video clips and stream links. .............................74 Sen d au dio fil es a nd v ide o cl ips .................... ...........75 Vie w inf orm ati on a bout a me dia cl ip......................75 RealPlayer settings............ ..................................... ....75 Music player..................................................... ..............75 Listen to music................... .............. ........... ........... ....75 Track lists................................ ................... .................76 Music categories.........................................................76 Preset frequency settings ..........................................76 Recorder..................................... ....................................76 Record a sound clip....................................................77 Play a recording........ ................ ...................... ............77 Recorder settings.................... ............. ............. .........77 Instant messag ing............. ................. ............. ............ .77 Define IM settings. ................ ........... ................. ..........78 Start a conversation...................................................78 IM groups.................................... ................. ...............78 Block users.............................................. ....................79 IM application set tings............. .......... ............. ......... .79 Flash player......... ..................... .......................... ............80 Manage flash files. ...................... ...................... ..........80 Visual radio................................................ ....................80 Listen to the radio...... ................................................80 View visual conten t...................................... ..............81 Saved stations. ............... ............... ............ ................ ..81 Visual Radio s ettings............ .................... ..................81 Push to talk. ............................................ .......................81 PTT settings....................... ............ ............ ................ .82 Log in to PTT se rvice................. ............ .................. ...82 Make a PTT call.................. .......... .......... ......... ............82 Created PTT calls. .......................... ..................... .........82 Manage PTT contacts................... ......... ............ ........ .83 Create a PTT channel. .................................................83 Exit PTT.................... ....................................................83 Abo ut G PS a nd s ate ll ite sign al s..... .......... ........... ......... 83 Positioning sett ings.................................... ..................84 Nokia Maps...... ............... .......... ............... ................ .......85 Download maps...... ................. ................. ................. .85 Satellite information. .................................... .............86 Browse maps..................................... ............... ..........86 Find a place.................................................................87 Plan a route...... ................. ................. ................. ........87 Navigation.. ................. .............. ................. .................87 Guides........................ ...................................... ............88 GPS data.........................................................................88 Use GPS data................................. ................ ..............88 Landmarks........................................... ..........................89 Create a landmark......................................................89 Edit landmarks...... ......................... .............................89 Landmark categories........................ ............ ........... ..89 Receive landmarks...................... ........... ............. .......90 Connectivity.......... ....... ........ ......... ........ .....91 Fast downloading ............. ............. ............. ............. .....91 Nokia PC Suite...... ....................... ................... ................91 Data cable............................................. ........................ .91 Infrared......................................................... .................92 Bluetooth.......................................................................92 About Bluetooth.........................................................92 Send and receive data with Bluetooth.....................93 Contents
Pair devices.................................................................94 Security tips................................... ......................... ....95 SIM access profile................................................ ..........95 Wireless LAN.......................................................... ........96 WLAN connections..... ................... ................... ...........96 See WLAN av ailability....... ................ ............... ...........96 WLAN wizard...... .................. ............. .................. ........96 Internet access points................ ....... ........ ........ .......... .97 Set up an intern et access point for packet data (GPRS)................................. .............................. ...........98 Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS).......... ................. ................ ................. ......98 Set up an access p oint for WLAN manually. .............99 Adv anc ed acc ess po int set tin gs f or WLA N...............99 Modem............................................. ........................... .100 Connection manager...................... ........... .......... .......100 View and end active connections...........................100 Search for WLAN.......................................................100 Se c u r i ty a nd da ta ma na ge men t.... ..........1 02 Lock the device........... ......................................... ........102 Memory card security.................. ........... ........... .........102 Fixed dialling...............................................................103 Certificate manager................................. .................. .103 View certificate details................... .................. .......104 Certificate trust settings..........................................104 Security modules........ ............... ................ ..................104 Vie w and e dit sec uri ty modu les...... ........... ............10 5 Back up data...................... ..........................................105 Remote configuration ............ .......... ......... .......... .......105 Application mana ger....................... ................... ........106 Install app lications..... ........................ ..................... .107 Installation set tings................................................. 107 Java security set tings............................................... 107 Activation keys............................................................108 Use activation keys ........ ............ ......... ......... ......... ...108 Data synch ronisation......................... .........................109 Create a synchronisation profile............................. 110 Sel ect ap plica tio ns to synchr onise ........ ................. 110 Synchronisation conne ction settings.....................110 Download!....................... ...................... ................ ......110 Select catalogs, folders, and ite ms.... ............... ......111 Download! se ttings......................................... .........111 Software updates... ............................................ .........111 Settings............................ ................. .......113 General settings.......................................... ................113 Personalisation set tings..........................................113 Display settin g s............. .......... .......... ............. .......113 Standby m ode setting s.........................................114 Tone settings.......................................... ...............114 Language sett ings................................................. 114 Notification light.................................. ................ .114 Date and time sett ings.............. ............ ............ ......115 Enhancement s ettings................................... ..........115 Common enhancement se ttings..........................115 Security setting s.................................. .....................115 Device and SIM card security........................... .....115 Restore original settings............................. ............116 Telephone settings.................................. ...................116 Call settings.. ................. ................. ................. ..........116 Network settings... ........................................... ........117 Connection settings .............................. ......................117 Access points.................. ........... ................. ............. .117 Pac ket dat a (GPR S) set tin gs... ........ ............... ..........11 8 WLAN settings..................... .......... ............. .......... ....118 Advanced WLAN settin gs.........................................118 WLAN security settings............................................119 Contents
WEP security settings.... .................. .........................119 WEP key settings............................................. .........119 802.1x security settings......... ...... ...... ...... ......... ......119 WPA security settings ............... ............. ............. .....120 Wireless LAN plugins...... .............................. ............120 EAP plug-ins...................................... .....................120 Use EAP plug-ins .. ................... .................... ...........120 Se ssi on i nit iat io n pr oto co l (S IP) set tin gs ...... ........1 20 Edit SIP profiles............... ......... ......... .......... .............121 Edit SIP proxy servers............... .............................. ..121 Edit registration servers.......................... ............... .121 Net call setting s.......................... ............................. .122 Configuration settings.............................................122 Restrict packet data.................................... .............122 Application settings .................................................... 122 Shortcuts............................ ......................123 General shortcuts.............. ..........................................123 Glossary.................... .......................... ......125 No kia ori gin al en ha nce ment s.............. ...1 29 Enhancements. ............................................................ 129 Battery...... ............................ ................ ........................129 Tro ublesh ootin g.. ....... ......... .............. ......130 Battery information......................... ........133 Charging and discharging.................................. ........133 Nok ia bat tery authe nti cation guid eline s.... ....... ......134 Authenticate hologra m.......... ........ ....... ............ ......134 What if your batt ery is not authentic?...................134 Car e an d ma int enanc e................ ............. 135 Addi tion al s afe ty i nforma tion................ .13 6 Small children ..................... ......................................... 136 Operating env ironment............ ........................ ..........136 Medical devices................. ............ ............. ............ .....136 Implanted medical devices............. ......... ....... ....... .136 Hearing aids... ....................... ....................................137 Vehicles........................................................................137 Pot entia lly exp losive envir onm ents.........................13 7 Emergency calls............... .................................... ........138 CERT IFICATI ON INFOR MATION (S AR)........... ................1 38 MAN UFA CTURER âÂÂS LIM ITED WARRA NTY......1 40 Warranty period. ........................................................ .140 How to get warr anty se rvi ce......... ................. ...........1 41 What is not covered?..................................................141 Other important notices..... ....................................... .142 Lim itati on o f Nok ia's l iab ility. ................. ................. .143 Statutory obligat ions............................. ..................... 143 Index................................................. .......144 Contents
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fol lowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON S AFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Al ways keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFE RENCE All wireless dev ices may be su sceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSPIT ALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WH EN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLAST ING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENS IBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product docu mentation . Do not touc h the antenna areas un necessarily. QUALIFIED SE RVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BAT TERIES Use only approved enhancements and batterie s. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPI ES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. 10 For your safety
CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible product s. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in serv ice. Press the end key as many times as needed to c lear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location . Do not end the ca ll until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is ap proved for use on the GSM 850, 900, 18 00, 1900, and UMTS 850 and 2100 networks. Contact your service provide r for more information about networks. When using the featu res in this device, obey all laws and respect loca l customs, privacy a nd legitimate rights of others, in cluding copyrights. Copyright protection s may prevent s ome images, music (including rin ging tones), and other conten t from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports int ernet connecti ons and other methods of connectivity . Like computers, your device may be expose d to viruses, malicious m essages an d applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and op en messages, accept conn ectivity requests, download content, and acce pt installations only from trustworthy source s. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly upda ting antiviru s software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this devi ce, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interfer ence or danger. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-sp eed data connection, the device may feel warm. In mo st cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect t he device is not working properly, take i t to the n earest auth orized service facility. The office applications support common features o f Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 ). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may ha ve limitations tha t affect how you can use network 11 For your safety
services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent cha racters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WA P 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these techn ologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always swit ch the dev ice off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. T his devi ce is intended for use when supplied with power from the AC-5 charger. The battery intended for use wi th this device is BP-6MT. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any ap proval or warranty, and may be dange rous. For availability of a ppr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. 12 For your safety
Get started Model number: Nokia E51-1. Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E51. Insert the SIM card and battery For availability an d information on usi ng SIM card services, conta ct your SIM ca rd vendor. This may be the service provider or other vendor. 1. With the back of the device facin g you, press the release button (1) and slide the back cover off ( 2). 2. If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing th e connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing th e top of the devi ce. 4. Insert the ba ttery. Align the contacts of the battery with the correspondin g connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 13 Get started
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolli ng. 3. When the batt ery is fully charged, disconn ect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, cha rge the battery until it has been fully charged according to the battery level indi cator. Tip: If you have old compat ible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the N okia E51 by attaching the CA -44 charger adapter to t he old charger. The adapte r is available as a separate enhancement. 14 Get started 2.
Keys and parts 1 â Earpiece 2 â Power key 3 â Volume up key 4 â Mute key. Press the key to m ute the microphone during a call. 5 â Volume down key 6 â Navi⢠scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. 7 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown abov e it on the display. 8 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end acti ve calls and held calls, and with a long key press, end da ta connections. 9 â Backspace key. Press th e key to delete items. 10 â Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key. Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silen t and General profiles. 11 â Press the key for a few seconds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writi n g text, press the key and select More symbols to access special characters. 12 â Call key 13 â Selection key 14 â Infrared port 15 â Voice key. This key is used in the voice commands, Recorder, and Push to talk ap plications. 16 â Notification light and light sensor 17 â Microphone 18 â Headset connector 19 â Wrist strap hole 20 â Mini-USB port 21 â Charger connector 15 Get started
1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â E-mail key 4 â Calendar key Connect the headset Warning: When you use the heads et, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the compatible headset to the he adset connector of y our device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist strap as show n, and tig hten it. First start-up 1. Press and hold the powe r key. 2 . I f t h e d e v i c e a s k s f o r a P I N c o d e o r l o c k code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located a n d the current date and time. To find y our country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the country later and the n ew country is located on a different time zone 4. The Welcome application opens. Select from the various options, or select Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the Settings wi zard application and the wizards available in the standby mode. When you switch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. 16 Get started
You can also contact your s ervice provider for the correct settings. Y o u c a n s w i t c h t h e d e v i c e o n w i t h n o S I M c a r d i n s e r t e d , in which case the device star ts up in the offline mode, and you cannot use the netw ork-dependent phone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the power key. Lock the keys When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. The keypad of your device locks automatically to prevent the keys from bein g accidentall y pressed. To change the period after wh ich the keypad is locked, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SI M card > Keypad autolock perio d . To lock the keys manually in the standby mode, press the left selection key and * . To unlock the keys, press the left selection key and * . Tip: To lock th e keys in the menu or in an open application, press the power key briefly, and select Lock k eypad . To unlock, press the left selection key and * . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network (network service). The bar ne xt to the icon indicates the signal strength of th e network at your current location. The higher the bar, the stronger the signal. The device is being used in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the charge in the battery. 17 Get started
You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is active . You have selected the Silent pr ofile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. Data is being tra nsmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the in dicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. An infrared connection is active. If the indicator blinks, your device is trying to connect to the oth er device, or the connec tion has b een lost. A G P R S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n ec tion is available (network service). A GPRS packet data connection is ac tive. A GPRS packet data connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). An EGPRS connection is active. An EGPRS packet data connection is on hold. A U M T S p a c k e t d a t a c o n n e c t i o n i s a v a i l a b l e ( n e t w o r k service). A UMTS packet data connection is active. A UMTS packet data connection on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). The icon may vary between regions. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is active. The icon may vary between regions. High-speed downlink pa cket access (HSDPA) is on hold. The icon may va ry between regions. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is acti ve in a network that has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device. The connection to a hea dset with Bl uetooth connectivity has been lost. 18 Get started
A hands-free car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing p ush-to-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because th e ringing type setti ng of your device is set to Beep on ce or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call . In this m ode, you cannot make PTT calls. Nokia support and contact information Check www.nokia-asia. com/E51/support or your local Nokia website for the latest gui d es, additiona l information, downloads, an d services related to your Nokia product. You may also download free configurat ion setting s such as MMS, GPRS, e-ma il, and other services for your device model at www.nokia- asia.com/phonesettings. If you need to contact customer service, check the list of local Nokia Care cont act c entres at www.nokia- asia.com/contactus. For maintenance services, check your nearest Nokia service centre a t www.nokia-asia.com/rep air. 19 Get started
Your Nokia E51 The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Welcome When you switch on your de vice for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you how t o use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar entr ies, from a com patible Nokia device. See "Transfer content between devices," p. 23 . ⢠Settings wizard helps you configure v arious settings. See "Settings wizar d," p. 20 . ⢠Opera tor contains a link to your operator's home portal. To open the Welcome application lat er, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available items may vary between regions. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these services, you may have to contact your service provider to activate a d ata connection or other services. The av ailability of the di fferent settings items in Settings wizard depends on the features of the device, SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability of the data in the Sett ings wizard database. If Settings wizard is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your d evice. To start the wizard, select Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are guided through the settings configurat ion. If there is n o SIM card inserted, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct, select the correct one from the list. If the settings configuration is interrupt ed, the settings are not defin ed. To access the main view of the Setting s wizard after the wizard has finished t he settings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select Options and from t he following: 20 Your Noki a E51
⢠Opera tor â Configure operator-specific settings such as MMS, interne t, WAP, and stre aming settings. ⢠E-mail settings â Confi g ure e-mail settings. ⢠Push t o talk â Confi gure push-to-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing settings. If you are not able to use Settin gs wizard, visit the Nokia phone se ttings web sit e. Standby modes Your device has two different standby modes: active standby mode and standby mode. Active standby After you have switched on your device and it is ready for use, but you have not entered any characters or made other selections, the device is in the active standby mode. In the active standby mode, you can view different indicators such as network operator indicators or indicators for alarms, an d applications you want to access fast. To select applications that you want to access from active stan dby, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Standby mode > Active s tandby apps . . To change the fu nctions of the selection keys in active standby, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > General > Personalisation > Standb y mode > Shortcuts . To use the basic standby mode, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Activ e standby > Off . Standby In the basic standby mode, you can see y our servic e provider, time, and different indicators, such as indicators for alarms. To view the most recently dialled numbers, press the call key. Scroll to a number or name, and p ress the call key again to call the number. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold 1 . To view calendar in formation, sc roll right. To write and send text messages, scroll left. To change these shortcuts, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Shor tcuts . 21 Your Noki a E51
Menu Select Menu . The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in t he device or on a memory card. The menu conta ins applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default sa ved in the Installatio ns folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Opt ions > Change view > List view . To return to the grid view, select Options > Change view > Grid view . To make the application icons and folders animated, select Options > Icon animation > On . To view the memory consumption of different applications an d data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Optio ns > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Option s > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and select Optio ns > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Optio ns > Download applications . Common actions in several applications You can find the following actions i n several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by scrolling right or left. To save the settings that you have configured in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Optio ns > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. 22 Your Noki a E51
To send a file, select Options > Send . You can sen d a file in an e-mail or mult imedia message, or using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. To copy, press and hold t he shift key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to pas te the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This method may not wo rk in applications that have their own c opy and pas te command s. To select different items, such as messages, file s, or contacts, scroll to the item you wa nt to select. S elect Option s > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select almost all items, first select Optio ns > Mark/U nma rk > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for example, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Transfer Select Menu > Tools > Swit ch . You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a compatib le Nokia devic e to you r new Eser ies device using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared. The type of content that can be transferred depends on th e device model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronis e data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Ese ries device does not need a SIM card when transferring data. Content is copied from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your devi c e. Copying time depends o n the amou nt of data to be transferr ed. You can also cancel and con tinue later. The necessary steps for d ata transfer may vary depending on your device, and whether you have interrupted data transfer ea rlier. The items that you can transfer vary depend ing on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the tw o devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some de vice models, the Transfer application is sent to the other device as a mess age. To install Transfer on the othe r device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from the other device. After the data transfer, you can save the shortcut with the trans fer setting s to the m ain view to repeat the same transfer lat er. To edit the shortc ut, select Option s > Shortcut settin gs . 23 Your Noki a E51
View transfer log A transfer log is sh own after every transfer. To view the transfer details, scroll to the transferred item in the log, and select Options > Det ails . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, if available, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved tra nsfer conflicts are also displayed i n the log view. To start so lving c onflicts, select Optio ns > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to your device with the Transfer appli cation , select from the following icons in the Transfer main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation , you can keep the data up-to-date in both devi ces. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other d evice. Personalisation You can personalise your device by adjusting the various tones, ba ckground images, and screen savers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customis e the ringing ton es, alert tones, and other device tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller grou ps. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display in the stan dby mode. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Cre ate new , an d define the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Personal ise . To chang e a profile, select a profile an d Opti ons > Activate . The Offline profile prevents your device from accidentally switching on, sending or receiving messages, or using wirele ss LAN, Bluetooth, or FM radio; it also closes any internet connection that may be in operation when the pr ofile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth co nnection at a later time, or from restarting the FM radio, so comp ly with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using these features. 24 Your Noki a E51
To delete a profile that you created, select Option s > Delete profile . You cannot delete the predefined profil es. Select ringing tones To set a ringing tone for a p rofile, s elec t Options > Personalise > Ringing tone . Select a rin ging tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Galle r y. To play the ringing tone for a selected contact group only, select Opti ons > Personalise > Aler t for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group hav e a silent alert. To change th e message tone, select Option s > Personalise > Me ssage alert ton e . Customise profiles Select Options > Personalis e , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or se lect Downlo ad sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringin g tone fo r each line. ⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller' s name â When you select this option and someone from your cont acts list calls you, the device sounds a ringin g tone that is a combination of the spoken name o f the contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â S elect how you want the ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing vo lume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text message s. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e- mail messages. ⢠IM aler t tone â Select a tone for received instant messages . ⢠Vibrating alert â Select whether you want the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Keypa d tones â Set the volume level of the device keypad tones. ⢠Warning tones â Set the warning tones on o r off. ⢠Alert for â You can set the device to ring only upon calls from phone numbers th at belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a silent alert. ⢠Profile n ame â You can giv e a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Change the display theme Select Menu > T ools > Themes . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder . 25 Your Noki a E51
To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particular application, select the application-specific folder. To change the backgrou nd image fo r the standby mode, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an image or write a text for the screen saver, select the Powe r saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select Options > Download > Downlo ad themes . E nter the link from wh ich you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Preview . To start using the selected theme, select Optio ns > Set . Change audio themes Select Menu > Tools > Themes > Audio theme . You can set sounds for various device ev ents. The sounds can be tones, speech, or a combination of both. To change the current audio theme, select Active audio theme . To set a sound for an event, open an event group, such as ringing tones , scroll to the desired event, and press the scroll key. To play the sound before activati ng it, select Options > Play voi ce . To create a new audio theme, select Op tions > Save theme . To add 3-D effects to the audio theme, select Options > 3-D ringing to nes . To set speech as the s ound for an event, select Speech . Enter the desired tex t to the text field. Th e Speech option is not available if you hav e set Say caller's name on in the current profile. To select a language for the speech, select Options > Set Speech language . To use all the preset sounds in an event group, scroll to the group, and select Options > Activate sounds . To silence all the sounds in an event group, select Optio ns > Deactivate sounds . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D ringing tones . To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones, select 3 -D ri nging t one effe cts > On . Not all ringing ton es support 3âÂÂD effe cts. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one dire ction to another. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. 26 Your Noki a E51
⢠Reverberatio n â To adjust the amount of echo, select the desired effect. ⢠Doppler effect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when you are farther aw ay. This setting is not available for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Option s > Play t one . To adjust the volume of the rin ging tone, select Menu > Tools > Profiles > Optio ns > Personalise > Ringing volume . Volume control To adjust the earpiece vo lume during a phone call or the volume o f the media a p plications, use the volume keys. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can access appl ications and tasks quickly. Each ke y has been assign ed an application an d a task. To change th ese, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > One-touch ke ys . Your network operator may have assigned a pplications to th e keys, in which case you cannot chan ge them. 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â E-mail key 4 â Calendar key Home key To access the m ain menu, press the ho me key briefly. Press the home key briefly again to ac cess the active standby. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll th e list. T o open the selected application , press the home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To clos e the selected application, press the backsp ace key. Leaving applications running in the background increases the de mand on battery power and reduces the battery life. Contacts key To open the Contacts application, press the contacts key briefly. 27 Your Noki a E51
To create a new contact, press the contacts ke y for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar applicati on, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entry, press the calendar key for a f ew secon ds. E-mail k ey To open your default mailbox, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a f ew secon ds. Multitasking You can have several applications open at the same time. To switch between ac ti ve applications, press and hold the home key, scroll to an app lication, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active ph one call and want to check y our calendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you are writing a message and want to check a web site , press th e home key to access th e menu, and op en the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your message, press and hold the home key, scroll to the message a nd press the scroll key. Memory There are two types of memory into which you can save data or install applicat ions: device memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memory remain s, and how m uch memory is consumed by each data type, select Menu > Optio ns > Memory details > Phone me mory or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you h ave adequate memory , transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install application s to a compat ible memory card, installation files (. sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large am ounts of memory and prevent you from storin g other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia P C Suite to back up installation files to a comp atible PC, then use the fi le manager to remov e the ins t allation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message at tachment, delete the messa ge from the Messaging inbox . 28 Your Noki a E51
Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSD This device uses a microSD memory card. To ensure interoperability, use only compatible microSD cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a microSD card with its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD cards are no t compati ble with this device. Using an incompatible memo ry card may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Insert the memory c ard Use a memory card to save the memory on your device. You can als o back up inform ation from your device to the memory card. The sales package of your device may not in clude a memory card. Memory cards are available as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facin g you, press the release button (1) and slide the back cover off ( 2). 2. Insert the memory card i n the slot with the conta ct area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in unti l it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Option s > Format memo ry card . When a memory card is formatted, all da ta on the card is lost permanently. Cons ult your retailer to fi nd out if you must format the memory card before you c an use it. To change the na me of the memor y card, select Option s > Memory card name . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauth orised access. To set a password, select 29 Your Noki a E51
Optio ns > Set pass word . The password can be up to eight characters long an d is case-sensitive. Th e password is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you us e the memory car d in the same device. If you use the memory card in another device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Optio ns > Remove password . When you remove the passwo rd, the data o n th e memory card is not protected against unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Optio ns > Unlock memo ry card . Enter the password. Eject the memory card Important: Do n ot remo ve the m emory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card i n the middle of an operation may dama ge the mem ory card as well a s the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. 1. Press the power ke y briefly, and select Re move memory card . 2. Press the release button and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory card to release it from the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is sho wn on the t op right of th e display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of th e sentence is written in uppercase and all the oth er letters a re automatically written in lowercase. indicates the num ber mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as t he pr esent one, wait until the cursor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the uppe r and lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a charac ter, press the backs pace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase mo re than one character. To access the most common punctua tion marks, press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. 30 Your Noki a E51
To add specia l characters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space , press 0 . To move the cursor to the next line, press 0 three times. To switch between the differe nt character cases, pres s # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predictive t ext input, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive t ext input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found. If the ? charact er is shown after th e word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionar y, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) usin g traditional text inp u t, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is fu ll, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll rig ht. Writ e the last part of the com pound word. To complete the compound w ord, press 0 to add a space. To switch predictive text input off for all e d itors in the device, press # twice quickly. Change the writing language When you are writi n g text, you can ch ange the writing language. For examp le, if you press the 6 key repeatedly to r each a specific chara cter, chang ing the writing language g ives you access to characters in a different order. If you are writing text using a non-Latin alphabet and want to w rite Latin charac ters, for example e-mail or web addresses, you m ay need to change the writing language. To change the writing langu age, select Option s > Writing language , and a writing language th at uses Latin characters. Antennas Note: Yo ur device may have internal and external antenn as. As with any ra dio transmitting device, avoid touchin g th e antenn a unnecessarily when the antenna is in u se. Contact with such an antenna aff ects the co mmunicatio n quality , may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. 31 Your Noki a E51
Further information Extended u ser guide An extended version of this user guide is available o n the Nokia web site. Some applications or functions are explained only in the extended user guide. Instructions in y our devi ce To read instructions for th e current view of the open application, select Options > Help . To browse the help topics an d conduct searches, select Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for which you want to see instru ct ions. Selec t a category , such as Messagi ng, to see wh at instructions (help topics) are available. Whil e you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to s ee the other topics in that categ ory. To switch between the application and help, press and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you information about your device and shows you how t o use it. Select Menu > Help > Tutorial . 32 Your Noki a E51
Business communications Your device provides you with efficient tools for voice communication and contact a nd time management. Telephone To make and receive calls, the device must be switc hed on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To con nect to a net call service, your device must be in the c overage of a connection network, such as a WLAN ac cess point . Voice calls Note: The actual invoice for calls and ser vices from your service provider may vary, depending on network features , rounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press th e call key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute th e ringing t one in stead of answering a ca ll, select Silence . When you have a n active call and the call waiting function (network service) is activated, pr ess the call key to answer a new incomi ng call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a ca ll Important: If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to activate the phone function. W hen the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise t he number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To make a call, enter t he phone number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For i nternational calls, a dd the character that replaces t he international acces s code, and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading 0, if necessar y), and phone number. To end the call or cancel th e call attempt, press the end key. 33 Business communica tions
To make a call using th e saved contacts, select Contacts in the standby mode. Enter t he first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press t he call key. See "Contacts," p. 42 . To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last called or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log," p. 41 . To adjust the volume of an active call, use the volume keys . To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Optio ns > Switch t o video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference ca ll, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. Wh en th e par ticip ant an swer s, se lect Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Co nference to merge the calls into a conference call. T o m u t e t h e m i c r o p h o n e o f y o u r d e v i c e d u r i n g t h e c a l l , select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and select Op tions > Conference > Drop part icipant . To discus s privately w ith a conference call participant, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Conference > Private . Fax calls To make and receive fax calls, connect your device to a compati ble com puter or fax mach ine. To activ ate the fax modem, select Opti ons > Activate mo dem . You can answer incoming fax ca lls only from the computer or fax machine connected to your device. To reject an incoming fax call, select Options > Reject . To reject a call while a fax call is in progress, select Reject . A fax call cannot be put on hold. Video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverag e of a UMTS net work. Fo r availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two -way video between you and the recipient of the call, if th e recipient has a compatible mobile phone. The video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. Make a video call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To make a video call, enter the phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select 34 Business communica tions
Option s > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, the came ra of the device is acti vated. If the camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in vi deo call . To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sendin g video , or Send ing aud. & video . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Option s > Activate loudspeaker . To mute t he loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of i m ages, select Options > Change image order . To zoom the image on the dis play, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a n ew voice call to the same recipient, select Opt ions > Switch to voice call . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device during a voice call. 1. Make a phone call to the se lected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phone call is established and your device has been regis tered to the SIP server. 2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share video > Live or Clip . To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the recipient's S I P address manually t o send an invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accept s the video sharing. 4. To end sharing t h e video, select Stop . The voice call continues normally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sh aring invitat ion, a message is displayed showing the ca ller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation an d begin the sharing session, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net call s Select Menu > Connectivity > Internet te l. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency ca ll through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cell ular telephony, you should us e cellular networks for emergency calls, if possibl e. If you have cellular network coverage availa ble, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls 35 Business communica tions
before you attempt an emer gency call. The capability for an emergency call us ing internet telephony depends on the ava ilability of a WLAN a nd your net call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your n et call provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the net call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN co verage, for example. The availability of th e net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you n eed to create a net call profile. 1. Sel ect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > SIP sett ings > Options > New SIP profil e , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service automatic, select Registration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Sel ect Back until you return to the Connection settings main view. 3. Sel ect Intern et tel. > Options > New profile . Enter a name for the p rofile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To set the created profile to be used automatically when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Connec tivity > Internet tel. > Pre ferred profil e . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When n eeded in the S IP settings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask your service p rovider for secure net call se ttings. The proxy se rver selected for the net call profile must support secure net calls. Connect to the net call service To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have s elected automatic login, your device automati cally connects to the net call service. If you lo gin to the s ervice ma nually, select an available netw ork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re fresh ed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh th e list manually, select Options > Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call service for outgo ing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Optio ns > Change service . To configure new services, select Options > Configure s ervice . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the network to which you are curren tly connec ted, se lect Options > Save ne twork . The saved networks are marke d with a star on the list of networks. To connect to a net call service usin g a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hid den netwo rk . To end the connection to a net call service, select Optio ns > Disconnect from serv. . 36 Business communica tions
Make net ca lls You can ma ke a net call from all applications where yo u can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Call > Inte rnet call . To make a net call in the sta ndby mode, enter the SIP address, and pr ess the call key. To make a net ca ll to an address t h at does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferred call ty pe for outgoing calls, select Menu > Conne ctivity > Internet tel. > Option s > Settings > Default call type > Inte rnet call . When your device is connected to a ne t call service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call service settings Select Options > Settings > Sett ings: . To login automatically to the net call ser vice, select Login type > Automati c . If you use th e automatic login type for WLANs, the device periodically scans for WLANs, which increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the n et call service and the networks detected by the net call service, select Saved conn. netw orks . To define the service-specific settings, select Edit service setti ngs . This option is on ly available if a service-specific software pl ug-in has been installed in the device. Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Cal l > Speed d ialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a n umber key in the stan dby mode. To assign a number key to a phon e number, select Menu > Tools > Sp eed dia l . Scroll to the n umber key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Opti ons > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Opt ions > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a n umber key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Opt ions > Change . Call divert Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Phone > Cal l divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. Fo r details, contact your service provider. Select to divert voice or fa x calls, and select from the following options: 37 Business communica tions
⢠All voice calls or All fax calls â Divert all inc oming voice or fax calls. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select the time you let the device ring before di verting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. T his option diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or ou t of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another phone number, select a call type and a divertin g option, then s elect Options > Activate > Diverted to: . Enter a number in the Number : field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Cont acts. To check the current di verting status, s c roll to the diverting option, and select Opti ons > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Op tion s > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that can be made or received with the device (network servic e). To change th e settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Call barring and call divertin g cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be poss ible to cer tain official emergency numbers. To bar calls, select Voice call barring an d from the following options: ⢠Outgoing calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Intern ational calls â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International calls e xcept to ho me country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of vo ic e call barrings, select the barring option and Options > Check s tatus . To stop all voice call barri ngs, select a barring option and Options > C ancel all barrings . To change the pass word used for barring voice and fax calls, select Voice call barring > Opti ons > Edi t barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barri ng password must be four digits long. For det ails, contact your s ervice provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . 38 Business communica tions
To reject net calls from anonymous ca llers, select Anonymous cal l barring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone mult i-frequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone serv ices. Send a DTMF tone s equence 1. Make a call, and wait unt il the other end answers. 2. Select Menu > Optio ns > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone se quence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Contacts . Open a contact, and select Options > Edi t > Options > Add detail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF ton es only after you select Se nd DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . Voice mail Select Menu > Tools > Call mailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for the first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > C all voice mailbox . If you have configured net ca ll settings to your device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Options > Call vo ice mailbox to call it. To call your voice mail in the standby mode, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you have defined an internet call ma ilbox, select whether you want to call your voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the internet call mailbox address, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > T ools > Voice aid . The Voice aid application re ads text on the display, allowing you to use the ba sic functions of your device without looking at the display. To hear the entries in you r contacts list, select Contacts . Do not use this option if you have more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and fr equent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your voice messages, se lect Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To hear the current tim e, select Clock > Time . To hear the current date, select Clock > Date . 39 Business communica tions
To hear more options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot her functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions desi gnated in the Voice commands ap plication. When a voice com m and is spoken , the device com pares the s poken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice commands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the mai n userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag fo r a contact is the name or ni ckname that is saved on the contact in Contacts. Note: Using voice tags m ay be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you s hould not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circ umstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a cont act, and select Optio ns > Play v oice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key . 2. When you hear the tone or see th e visual display, clearly speak the name saved on the contact. 3. The device plays a synthesi sed voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and nu mber. After a timeou t of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact wa s not cor rect, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several numbers are saved under the contact, the device selects the default nu mber, if it has been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first availa ble number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business ) , Telephone , Te l. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice commands application. To launch an application using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, an d clearly speak the name of the application. If the recognised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the list, select Op tions > New applicat ion . To change the voice comman d of an application, select Optio ns > Change command , and enter the new comman d. 40 Business communica tions
Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice comman d, select Profiles > Option s > Change command . Voice command settings To switch off the synthesi ser that plays recogni sed voice commands in the sele cted device language, select Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition le arning when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove v oice adapts. . Log Select Menu > Log . Log stores information about the communication history of the device. T he device registers missed and received calls only if th e network supports these functions, the device is sw itched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls, select Recent call s . Tip: To open Dialled numbers in the standby modes, press the call key. To view the approximate dura tion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred during packet data connections, se lect Packet data . Monitor all communications To monitor all voice calls , text messages, or data connections registered by th e device, open the general log tab. To view detailed inform ation about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subevents, such as a text m essage se nt in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one com munication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging cen tre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contact s, select Options > Save to Cont acts , and select to create a new contact or to add the phone number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Copy number . To view a single type of communication event or communication ev ents with one other p arty, select Option s > Filter , and select the desired filter. 41 Business communica tions
To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Optio ns > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Optio ns > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls and o pen Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled number s . Select the caller, and select Option s > Create message . You can send t ext messages and multimedia me ssages. Log settin gs To set the time for keepin g all communication events in the log, select Optio ns > Sett ings > Log duration , an d the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. Contacts Select Menu > Contacts . You can save and update conta ct information, such as phone numbers, home addresse s, or e-mail addresses of your c ontac ts. You ca n add a personal rin ging tone or a thum bnail image to a cont act. You can also creat e contact groups, which allow you to send tex t or e-mail messages to man y recipients at the same time. You can add received contact inform ation (business cards) to Contacts. Cont act information c an only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Copy contacts between SIM and device memory If you already have contacts saved on your SIM card, you can copy them to the device memory. To copy contacts from a SIM card to the device memory, select Option s > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Mark the contacts to copy, or se lect Option s > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark all to copy all contacts. Se lect Optio ns > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts from th e device memory to a SI M card, select Options > Copy to SIM directory . Mark the contacts you want to cop y, or select Options > Mark/ Unmar k > Mark all to copy all contacts. Se lect Optio ns > Copy to SIM directory . Tip: If you have saved contacts on your previous device, you can use the Transfer application to copy them. See "Transfer content between devices," p. 23 . Manage contacts To add a new contact, select Optio ns > New contact . 42 Business communica tions
To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact, select Option s > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnai l image is shown when the contact calls. To listen to the voice tag as signed to the contact, select Option s > Play voi ce tag . To search for a contact, en ter the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the cont acts starting with the letters ap pear on the display. To edit information in a contact, select Optio ns > Edit . Tip: You can als o use Nokia PC Sui t e to add and edit contacts. To send contact information, select Options > Se nd . You can assig n a default numbe r o r address to a contact so you can easily call or send a messa ge to the default number or address, even if several numbers or addresses are saved to tha t contact. The default number is also used in voice dialling. To change the defau lt information for a contact, op en the cont act, and select Options > Defaults . Select the number or address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the cont act. To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). Tip: To ch eck to w hich groups a contac t belongs , select Options > Belongs to groups . To add a speed dial key to the contact' s phone number, select Option s > Assign speed dial . To change the display order of the first and last na mes of your cont acts, s elect Options > Sett ings , and Last name First name , or First name Last name . Manage contac t groups You can create a contact group so t hat you can send messages t o several recipie nts at the same time. 1. Open the contact grou ps tab, and select Options > New group . 2. Enter a name for the group, and select OK . 3. Open the group, and select Optio ns > Add members . 4. Scroll to each contact you want to a dd to the group, and press the scroll key to mark it. 5. Select OK to add all marked contacts to the group. To remove a contact from a con tact group, scroll to the contact that you want to remove, and select Options > Remove from group . Add ringing tones for contacts You can select a ringin g tone for a contact or contact group. If the caller's phone number is sent wit h the incoming call and your devi ce recognises the number, the ringin g tone p lays when the contac t calls you. To select a ringing t one for a contact or contact group, open the conta ct or contact g roup, and select Option s > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. Select the ringing to ne you want to use. 43 Business communica tions
To remove the assigned ri nging tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Send business cards To send a busine ss card, select th e contact from Contacts, select Options > Send , and the sendi ng method. Enter the phone numb er or address, or add a reci pie nt fr om Co ntacts. Select Opt ions > Send . If you select text mess age as the sen d ing method, business cards are sent wi thout thumbnai l images. Manage received business cards To view a received business card, select Open from the displayed notification, or open the message from the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. To save a received bu siness card, select > Save business card . SIM directory Select Opti ons > SI M contacts > SIM directory . In the SIM directory, you can see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card; add, edit, or copy numbers to contac ts ; and make calls. To view a SIM contact, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add contacts to your SI M directory, select Options > New SIM contac t . Enter the contact information and select Done . To view the list of fixe d dialling numbers, select Optio ns > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . Th is setting is only shown if su pported by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your device to selected phone numbers , select Options > Activate fixed di alling . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your serv ice provider if you do not ha ve the code. To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Optio ns > New SIM cont act . You need the PIN2 code for this function. When yo u use fixed dialling, packet data connections are not possible, except when sending text mess ages over a packet data connection. In this case, the messag e centre number and the recipient's phone number mu st be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixe d dialling is activ ated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To view your own numbers, if stored on the SIM card, select Options > My numbers . Fo r example, you may have subscribed to two phon e lines with the same SIM card. Not a ll SIM cards cont ain your own nu mbers. To edit the contact information, select Options > Edit . To copy the contact from the SIM directory to Contacts, select Options > Copy to Contacts . To check the amount of fr ee memory on your SIM card, select Options > SIM card details . 44 Business communica tions
Calendar Select Menu > Calendar . You can c reate and vi ew scheduled events and appointments. You can also set ala rms for calenda r entries. To synchroni se your calendar data with a compatible computer, use Nokia PC Suite. See the Nokia PC Suite guide. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries have a specific date and time. ⢠Memo entries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Annivers ary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a certain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entri es remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specific time of the day. To create a calenda r entry, scroll to a date, and select Option s > New en try . Select the entry type. The available settin gs for meeting, memo, anniversary, and to-do entries vary. Select from the following: ⢠Subject or Occasion â Enter a description for the entry. ⢠Loc atio n â Enter the locati on information. ⢠Star t time â Enter the start time . ⢠End time â Enter the end time. ⢠Start date or Date â Ente r the start date or date the event occurs. ⢠End date â Enter the end dat e. ⢠Alarm â Set an alarm for meeting and annivers ary entries. The alarm is displayed in the day view. ⢠Repeat â Specify whether you want the entry to be repeated and when. Define th e repeat type, frequency, and poss ible ending date. ⢠Synchronisatio n â If you selec t Private , the calendar entry can be seen only by you and is not shown to others with on line access to view th e calendar. If you select Public , the calendar entry is shown to others who ha ve access to view your calendar online. If you select Non e , the calendar entry is not copied to your computer when you synchronis e. Tip: Make sure you have selected the correct city in the Clock application, because scheduled calendar entries may change when the current city is changed and is on another time zone. To edit an existing entry, scroll to the entry , and select Option s > Open . Edit the details in the various fields. To delete a calendar entry, select Op tions > Del ete , and select Before date to delete all entries before the selected date, or All entries to delete all calendar entries from the device. Tip: When you edit or de lete a repeat ed entry, choose how y ou want t he ch a n g e t o t a k e e ff e c t . If you selec t All calendar en tries dele ted , all repeated entries are deleted. If you select Delete entry , only the current entry is deleted. 45 Business communica tions
To send a calendar entry to a compatible device, select Optio ns > Send > Via text me ssage , Via multim edia , Via e-mail , Via Bluetooth , or Via infrared . If the other device is not compatible with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the time information of received calendar entries may not be displa yed corre ctly. To add a received calendar entry to your calendar, open the calendar entry attach ment in the message, and select Options > Save to Calendar . To respond to a received calendar entry, select Accept , Tentativ e , or Decline , if available. If you accept the entry or mark it as tentative, the entry is added to your calendar. You can send a response to the sender of the calendar entry by e-mail. Select Yes , and the message is saved in Ou tbox to wait for sending. Create a meeting entry 1. Scroll to a date, and select Op tions > New entry > Meeting . 2. Enter the subject, location, start and end time, and the start and end dates, if needed. 3. To set an alarm for the meeting, s elect Alarm > On . Enter the alarm tim e and date. 4. Select whether this is a repeating meeting. 5. Define how the ent ry is handled during synchronisation in the Synchronis ation field. Select Private to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers if the calendar is availab le online, or None to prevent copying the entry to your computer when you synchronise. To-do entries You can create and ma intain a task or list of tas ks that must be done by a certai n day. Each task can be assigned a due date, and an alarm. Create a to-do e ntry 1. Scroll to a date, an d select Opt ions > New entry > To-do . 2. Enter th e subject in th e Subject field. 3. Enter th e due date. 4. To set an ala rm for the t o-do entry, select Alarm > On . Enter the alarm tim e and date. 5. Specify a priority. The priority icons are ( ! ) High and ( - ) Low . There is no icon for Norm al . 6. Define how the ent ry is handled during synchronisation in the Synchronisation field. Select Pr ivate to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is availa ble online, Public to make the entry visible to viewers if the calendar is available online, or None to not copy the entry to your computer when you synchronise. Calendar views The Calendar ha s four views: in the month view, you can see the entire month at one time; the week view shows the events for the se lected week in s even day boxes; the day view shows the events for the selected 46 Business communica tions
day; and the to-do view sh o ws the to -do items fo r the selected day. Work in different views To switch between the differe nt calenda r views, select Option s in any calendar view. Select the type of view from the list. To set the default calendar view, select Optio ns > Settin gs > Default v iew , and the view you want. To view a specific date, select Options > Go to date , and enter the date. Month view Select Options > Month view . In the month view, you can s ee the entire month at one time. Each row shows one week of dates. The active month is displayed, and the active day is either toda y or the last day that was viewed. The active day is marked with a coloured square. Day s that have scheduled events are marked with a small triangle. Press the scroll key to open the day's entry. Week view Select Options > Week view . The week view show s the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. Today's date is marked with a coloured square. Memos and a nniversaries are p laced before 8:00 a.m. To change th e starting day of the week, select Option s > Sett ings > Week starts on . Day view Select Option s > Day view . The day view shows the even ts for the selected day. Entries are grouped into time slots according to their startin g time. T o view th e previou s or next day , scroll left or right. To-do view Select Option s > To-do view . The to-do view shows the to -do items for the selected day. To mark a task as completed, select Opti ons > Mark as done . To restore a task, select Options > Mark as not done . Calendar settings Select Option s > Settings . To change the ala rm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view dis p layed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first day of the week, select Week starts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week numbe r or We ek dates . 47 Business communica tions
Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network service), you need to configure the internet access point setti ngs. If you are using a GPRS connection, your wireless network must support GPRS, and the service mus t be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access poi nt settings from your service provider as a special text message or from th e service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points," p. 97 . Check the availabi lity of serv ices, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unreadable or not supported and garbage code is found whil e browsing , you can t ry to select Menu > Web > Options > Page > Defau lt encodin g , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indi cator ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data tran smission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the ga teway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure . The serv ice provider secures t he data transmission between the ga teway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . U se only services that you trust an d that offer adequa te security and protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start to enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your inp ut are displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, an d press the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, which is shown as a pointer on the pa ge. When you move the pointer over a link, the p ointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually ap pear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. The address es of the pag es you visit are saved in th e Auto. bookmarks folder. 48 Business communica tions
Bookmarks Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party int ernet sites. You may a lso access oth er third-part y sites through y our device. Third-pa rty sites are not affiliated with Nokia , and Nokia does not endorse or ass ume liability for them. If you choose to access such site s, you should take precautions for security or content. To view a bookmarked web page, scroll to the bookma rk, and press t he scroll key. To browse to another web page, select Options > Navigation options > Go to web addre ss , enter th e page address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark, select Optio ns > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, sele ct Options > Bookmark manager in the Web main view. You can move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or ha ve accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services yo u have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and blogs Select Menu > We b > Web f eeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening of weblog, which is a cont inuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Option s > Manage feed > New feed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection an d view the browser page offline, select Options > Tool s > Disconnect . To end the connection and clos e the browser, select Option s > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > We b > Options > Settings . The Web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠Gener al contains access point and home page relate d setti ngs. ⢠Page contains imaging, aud io, and pop-up settings. ⢠Privacy con tains settings related your privacy. ⢠Web feeds contains settings related to web feeds and blogs. 49 Business communica tions
Messaging Select Menu > Messaging . In Messaging (network se rvice), you can send and receive te xt messages, multimedia me ssages, audi o messages, a nd e-mail messages . You can also re ceive web service messages, cell broadcast messag es, and special message s containing dat a, and send servi ce commands . Before sending or receiv ing messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the ne twork supports the m essaging features you want to us e and that they are a ctivated on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access poin t settings on the device. See "Internet access point s," p. 97 . ⢠Define the e-mail account settings on the device. See "E-mail account settings," p. 62 . ⢠Define the text messa ge setting s on the device. See "Text message settin gs," p. 60 . ⢠Define the multimedia me ssa ge settings on the device. See " Multimedia me ssage settings," p. 61 . The device may recognise the SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message se ttings. If not, you may need to defi ne the settings man ually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data rece ived using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inb ox folder. E-mail messages are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Mess ages that are wa iting to be sent are stored in the Outbo x folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth and infrared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages ar e placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is ou tside network coverage. You can also sche dule e-mail messa ges to be sent the next time you conn ect to your remote mailbox. Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not in dicate that the message is received at the intended dest ination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages an d multimedia messages you have sent (network service), select Options > 50 Messaging
Settin gs > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organise messages To create a new folder to organise your messages, select My folders > Optio ns > New fo lder . To rename a folder, select Options > Rename folder . Yo u can only rename folders that you have created. To move a message to another folder, select Options > Move to folder , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Opti ons > Sort b y . You can sort the messages by Dat e , Sender , Subject , o r Message type . To view the properties of a message, select the message a nd Optio ns > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text, multimedia, and e-mail messages aloud. The message reader cannot read e-ma il mess ages in add-on e-mail applications. To play a mess age, press and hold the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading a messa ge in Inbox or mailbox, s elect Option s > Listen . To start reading th e next mess age in I nbox or ma ilbox, scroll down. To start r eading the mess age again, scroll up. In the beginning of the me ssage, scroll up to hear the previous message. To pause the reading, pre ss the left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > T ools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice properties To set the language for the message rea der, select Language . To download additiona l languages to your device, visit th e Nokia web site or use the Download! applicati on. To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language-dependent. To set the sp eaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the sp eaking volume, select Voice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, select the voice, and select Play voice . 51 Messaging
E-mail messages Select Menu > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with internet standards SMTP, IM AP4 (rev isio n 1), and PO P3, and with different vendor-specific e-mail solutions. Other e-mail providers may offer services with different settings or features tha n those described in this user guide. Contact your e-mail provi der or service provider for more details. Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail on your device, you must also do the following: ⢠Configure an internet access point. See "Internet access points," p. 97 . ⢠Set up an e-mail ac count, and de fine the e-mail settings correctly. To do this, use the mailbox guide, or define the account ma nually. See "E-mail account settings," p. 62 . Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Set up your e-mail with the mailbox guide If you sele ct Menu > Messaging > Mailbox , and have not set u p your e-ma il account, yo u are prompted to do so. To start settin g up the e-ma il account wit h the mailbox guide, select Yes . 1. To start entering the e-mail settings, select Start . 2. In Mailb ox type , select IMAP4 or POP3 , and select Next . Tip: POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e- mail or internet mail message s from a serve r. IMAP4 is a version of the internet message access protocol that lets you access and manage e-mail messages wh ile the messages are still on the e-mail server. You can then choose which messages to download to your device. 3. In My e-ma il address , enter your e-mail address. Select Next . 4. In I ncoming mail server , enter the name of the remote server that receiv es your e-mail, and s elect Next . 5. In Outgoing mail server , enter the name of the remote server that send s your e-mail, and select Next . Depending on your mobile operator, you might have to use your mobile operator' s outgoing mail server instead of your e-mail provider's. 6. In Acce ss point , select the internet access point your device should us e when it retrieves the e-mail. If you se lect Alway s ask , each time the device starts to retrieve e-mail, it as ks which internet access point it should use. Select Next . 7. Enter a name for your new mailbox, and select Finish . When you create a new mailbox, th e name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailb ox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. 52 Messaging
If you have defined several mailboxes , select one of them as your default mail box. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a ne w e-mail message. To def ine the default mai lbox, select Options > Settin gs > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not au tomatica lly received by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to th e remote mailbox; then select the e- mail messages you w ish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your mailbox in the Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mail box? , select Yes . 2. Enter your user name and password, if prompted. 3. Select Optio ns > Retrie ve e-mail > New to retrieve new messages that you have neither rea d nor retrieved, Sele cted to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailbox, or All to retrieve all me ssages not previously retrieve d. 4. To manage your e-mail o ffline to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow a data co nnectio n, sele ct Options > Disconnect to disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the nex t time you go online an d synchronise. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise c aution when opening messages. E-mail messages may con tain malicious software or o therwise be harm ful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an attachment, select Opti ons > Attachmen ts . Scroll to the attachment, a nd press the scroll key. To reply only to the sender of an e-mail, select Option s > Reply > To sender . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To all . Tip: If you repl y to an e-mail that contains attached files, the attachments are n ot included in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail, the attachments are included. To forward an e-mail, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail messa ge, select Options > Insert and the attach ment you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you are sending, selec t the attachm ent and Option s > Remove . To set the message priority , select Options > Sending options > Priority . To set the sending time for the e- mail message, select Option s > Send ing option s > Send mess age . Select Immediat ely , or selec t When conn. avail. if you are working offline. 53 Messaging
To call the sender of the e- mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Options > Call . To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio message or mult imedia messa ge, select Optio ns > Create message . Write and send e- mail 1. To write an e-mail, select Ne w message > E- mail . 2. Sel ect Options > Add recipient to select the recipients' e-mail addresses from Contacts, or enter the e-mail addresses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. 3. In t he Subject field, enter the subject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from the In box and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (header remains) . To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote server, sele ct Optio n s > Delete > Pho ne and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Rest ore . Subfolders in your remote e- mail If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage thes e folders with your device when you subscribe to th em. You can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, es tablish a connection, and select Options > E-mail settings > Retrieval settings > Folder s ubscripti ons . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if th e folders are large. To update the list of fold ers, select a folder and Optio ns > Update fold er list . Text messages Select Menu > Messaging . Write and send text messages Select Menu > Messaging . Your device supports the sending of text messa ges beyond the limit for a single message. Longer messages are se nt as two or more messages. Your 54 Messaging
service provider may charge accordingly. Characters with accents or other marks, and ch aracters from so me language opti ons, take up more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message . 1. To write a text message, sele ct New mess age > Text message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, sep arate the numbers with a semi colon. 3. Enter the text of the messag e. To use a template, select Option s > Insert > Te mplate . 4. Select Optio ns > Send . Sending options for text messages To select a message centre to sen d the messa ge, select Option s > Sendi ng options > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages ( network service ), select Options > Sending o ptions > Receive report > Yes . To define how long the me ssa ge centre resends your message (network service) if the first attempt fails, select Option s > Sending options > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reached with in the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. To convert the message to another format, select Option s > Send ing option s > Message sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , o r E-mai l . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages in to these other formats. Contact your service provider. Text messag es on th e SIM card Select Option s > SIM messages . Text messages may be stored on your SIM card. Before you can vi ew SIM me ssages, y ou must copy the messages to a folder in th e device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view them in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Select Opt ions > Co py . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the messages, and open a mess age. View pict ure messages Note: The appearance of a picture message m ay vary depending on the receiving device. To view a picture message, open the message from the Inbox folder. 55 Messaging
To view information about the picture message, select Optio ns > Message details . To save a messa ge in a different folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Cont acts, select Optio ns > Save to Contacts . Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Option s > Forward . 2. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a reci pient from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, separa te the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter the text of your mess age. To use a templa te, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Sel ect Options > Send . Tip: To remove the picture from the mess age, select Opti ons > Remove picture . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Messaging . Only devices that ha ve comp atible features can receive and display multimedia me ssages. The appearan ce of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS ) can cont ain text and objects such as images, so und clips, or video clips. Before you can send or re ceive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia message settin g s. Your de vice may ha ve recognised the SIM card provider and automatica lly configured the multimedia message settings. If not, use Settings wizard, or contact your service provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message settin g s," p. 61 . Create and send multimedia messages Impor tant: Exercise caution w hen opening messages. Messa ges may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new mess age, select New message > Multimedia message . 2. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scro ll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. In t he Subj ect field, enter a subjec t for the message. To change the fie lds that are visible, select Options > Addre ss fie lds . 4. Enter the text of the mess age, and select Options > Insert obje ct to add media objects. You can add objects such as Imag e , Sound clip , or Video clip . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message can contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your 56 Messaging
message, select Options > Insert new > Slide . To change the order of slides in your message, select Option s > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia message before sending it, sel ect Options > Preview . 7. Select Optio ns > Send . To delete an object from a multimedia message, select Option s > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, select Optio ns > Sending options . Receive and re ply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device such as a computer, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimedia message, open the message, and select Option s > Reply . 2. Select Options and To sender to reply to the s ender with a multimedia message, Via text me ssage to reply with a text messag e, Via audio message to reply with an audio message, or Via e- mail to reply with an e- mail mess age. Tip: To add recipients to your reply, select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients of the message from Contacts, or enter the recipients' phone numbers or e- mail addresses manua lly in the To field. 3. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Send . Create presentations Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if the MMS creation mod e setting is set to Restricted . To change the setting, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multim edia message > MMS creation mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select Ne w message > Multimedia mess age . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press th e scroll key to add a recipient from Conta c ts. If you e n ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 3. Select Opt ions > Create presentat ion and a presentati on template. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they ap pear, and which effects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text ar ea and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Opti ons > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New sli de . 57 Messaging
To select the background colour for the presentation and background images for different slides, select Optio ns > Background settings . To set effects between images or s lides, select Optio ns > Effect settings . To preview the presentation, select Options > Preview . Multimedi a presentations may only be viewed in compatible devices th at support presentations. They may appe ar different in different devic es. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scro ll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the pres entation, select Opti ons > Continue . If the text or i mages are too large to fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolling , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You may u se these numbers and addresses to make calls, se nd messages, or create bookmarks, for example. View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open th e message, and select Optio ns > Play pr esentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia message, select View image , Play sound clip , or Play vide o clip . To view the name and size of an attachment, open the message, an d select Options > Object s . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a mu ltimedia notification, and press the scroll key. To send th e message to a compatible device without retr ieving it to your device, select Options > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia message forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In t he To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scro ll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . 58 Messaging
Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Options > Sending optio ns . Send a sound clip 1. To compose an audio message, select New message > Audio message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipi ent's number or e-mail address, or pre ss the scroll key to a dd a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separa te them with a semicolon. 3. Select Optio ns > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Select Optio ns > Send . Sending options for multimedia messages Select New messag e > Mult imedia mes sage > Option s > Sendi ng options and fr om the following options: ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if you want to receive a notification when the message has been successfully delivered to th e recipient. Receiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message th at has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng the mess aging centre tries to send the me ssage. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached w ithin the validity period, the message is removed from the multimedia messagin g centre. The network must support this feature. Maxi mum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by th e network. Special message types Select Menu > Me ssaging . You can recei ve special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-mail account sett ings. To save the contents of these messages, select Option s > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications such as news headlines, servi c es, or links th rough which the m essage c ontent can be download ed. To define the service message settings, select Option s > Sett ings > Service me ssage . To downloa d the servic e or message co ntent, select Option s > Download message . To view informati on about the sender, web a ddress, expiration date, and other details of the message before downloading it, select Option s > Message details . Send service commands You can send a service request message (also known as a USSD command) to your service provider and 59 Messaging
request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service reques t message, select Options > Service comma nd . Enter the service request text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Messaging > Opti ons > Cel l broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcas t mess ages cannot be received w hen the d e v i c e i s i n t h e r e m o t e S I M m o d e . A p a c k e t d a t a ( G P R S ) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast mess ages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Reception > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the topic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Optio ns > Subs cribe . Tip: You can set important top ics as hot t opics. While the device is in the st andby mode, you are notified when you rece ive a message rela ted to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Optio ns > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Optio ns > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Messaging > Opti ons > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configur e the correc t te xt message, multimedia message, and GPRS se ttings automatically. If not, contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or us e the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the ava ilable message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centre to send the message. ⢠Character encoding â Select Redu ced supp ort to use automatic cha racter conversion to another encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Select Yes if yo u want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network service). ⢠Message validity â Sele ct how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails 60 Messaging
(network service). If the recipient cannot be reached within the vali dity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format , such as Te xt , Fax , Pagi ng , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message cent re is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text message s from your device . ⢠Reply v ia sa me centre â Select wh ether you want the reply messa ge to be sent using the same t ext message centre numbe r (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Options > Settings > Multim edia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image size â Select Small or Larg e to scale images in multimedia me ssages. Se lect Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mode â Select Restricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may n ot be supported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about includin g such content, se lect Guided . To create a multimedia message with no restrictions on attach ment type, select Free . If you select Restricted , creating multimedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multim edia message centre. You may n ot be able to ch ange the default access point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. ⢠Multimedia ret rieval â Select Always automatic to receive multimed ia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new mult imedia me ssage that y ou can retrieve from the message centre (for example, when you are travelling abroa d and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedi a messages from the message centre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any mult imedia message s. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive me ssages from un known sende rs. ⢠Receive advert s â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes to have the s tatus of the sent m essage to be sho wn in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been se nt to an e-mail ad dress may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Select Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia m essages. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng th e messagin g centre tries to send the message (network service). If the recipient of a mes sage cannot be reached within the validity p eriod, the messa ge is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the ma ximum amount of time allowed by the network. 61 Messaging
E-mail account settings Select Menu > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox settings but have not set up an e-mail account, the ma ilbox gui de opens and helps you set up your e-mail account. If yo u have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the setti ngs. The settings available for editing may vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection se ttings, select an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection settings . To edit the settings fo r the e-mail you receive, select Incom ing e-mail . To edit the setting s for the e- mail you s end, select Outgoing e-ma il . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Options > Edit > User setti ngs , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â Enter a nam e to appear before yo ur e- mail address when you sen d e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Selec t whether yo u want replies to be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You ca n only enter one add ress to which replies are directed. ⢠Delete e-mails from â Select whet her you want to delete the e-mail messages on ly from the device or from both the device an d the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send mess age â Select to send the e-mail immediately or when a co nnection is available. ⢠Send copy to self â Select whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail add ress in the Outgoi ng e-mail settings . ⢠Include signature â Select whet her you want to attach a si gnature to your e-mail messages. ⢠New e-mail ale rts â Select whether you want to be notified of a new received e-mail message with a tone and a note . Retrieval settings To define the retrieval se ttings, select the e-mail account, select Op tions > Edit > Retri eval settings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to re trieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header information such as sender , subjec t and dat e, e-ma il, or e- mail with attachment s. This setting i s for POP3 mailbox es only. ⢠Retrieval amo unt â Select the number of e-mail messages yo u want to ret rieve from the r emote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder path â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Th is setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. 62 Messaging
Automatic retrieval settings To define the automatic retrieva l settings for an e-mail account, select th e account, select Opt ions > Edit > Automatic re trieval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retr ieval â Select Enabled to retrieve new e-mail messages a u tomatically from your remot e mailbox, or Only in home net w. t o r e t r ie v e n e w e - mail messages au tomatically from your remote mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠Retrieval days â Select the days on which e-mai l is retrieved to your device. ⢠Retrieval hours â Define the hours between whi c h the e-mail is retrieved. ⢠Retrieval interval â S elect the interval between retrievin g new e-mail me ssages. ⢠E-mail notifications â Select whether you want to receive notifications on received e-mail. Service message settings Select Menu > Messagi ng > Optio ns > Settings > Service mess age . To receive service messages from service providers, select Service messages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, select Options > Settin gs > Service mess age > Download messages > Automatically or Manually . If y ou select Automatically , you may still need to con firm some downloads since not all services can be downloaded automa tically. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Messaging > Option s > Setti ngs > Cell broadcast . To receive ce ll broadcast messages, select Reception > On . To select the languages in wh ich you want to receive cell broadcast messages, select Language . To display new topics in th e cell broadcast topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Messaging > Option s > Setti ngs > Other . Select from the following: ⢠Save sent messages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Numbe r of sav ed msgs. â Enter the number of sent messages to save. When the limit is reache d, the oldest messa ge is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You ca n save messages t o the memory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder v iew â Define how you want the mess ages in Inbox to be shown. 63 Messaging
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools sup port mobile business and enable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active n otes . Active notes allows you to create, edit, and view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping li sts. Y ou can insert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, su ch as Contacts, and send notes to others . Create and edit notes To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, scroll t o it, and press the scroll key. To insert images, sound clip s, video, business card s, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Insert object . To add new items to the note, se lect Options > Insert new . You ca n record sound and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the text. Then select Optio ns > Text . To send the note u sing a tex t messag e, multimedia message, e-mail, Bluetooth, or infrared, select Optio ns > Send . To link a n ote to a co ntact, select Options > Link note to cal l > Add contacts . You can s ee the note on the display of your device when ma king a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Settings . To save notes to your device mem ory, select Memory in use > Phone me mory . To save them to a memory card, sel ect Memo ry in use > Memory card . To chang e the layout of active n otes, select Change view > Gr id . To view the notes as a list , select Change view > List . To see a note in the ba ckground when making or receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g c a l l > Yes . 64 Nokia Office Tools
Tip: If you te mporarily do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show note during call > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between note s and contact cards. Search Select Menu > Office > In-dev ice search . With Search, you can search for information in your contacts, notes, ca lendar appointments, to-do notes, e-mail messages, multim edia messages, and text messages. You can also search for files by the file names in your device memory and memory card. Search for information 1. Select the content type s you want to search in. To remove the selection, select it again. To include all content types in your search, select Select all . 2. Enter your search keywords o r some part of the keywords. 3. Select Search . Tip: Wildcards may help you find items. In your search keyword, us e ? to substitute a s ingle character, and * to substitute zero or more characters. If you use a wildcard, add * to the beginning and end of the search keyword. To view the sea rch results from your previou s search, select Option s > Previous resul ts . Search results To open the content, select the desired search result. You may then use the co nten t, for example, to answer e-mail messa ges or edit documents. To conduct a new se arch, select Options > New search . Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator ha s limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculat ion, ente r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function m ap. Enter the second number of the calculation, an d select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a n ew calculation. The device saves the result of the last calculation in its memory. Exiting the Calculator applicati o n or switching off the device do es not clear the memo ry. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Opti ons > Last result . To save the number s or results of a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a calculat ion, select Opt ions > Memory > Recall . 65 Nokia Office Tools
File manager With File manager, you ca n manage the contents and properties of files and folders on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may pr event sending som e files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, sc roll to each file, and selec t Optio ns > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Op tions > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Optio ns > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . E nter the search text, and press t h e scroll key. The folders and files whos e names conta in the sear ch text are displaye d. To view information about the selected file, select Optio ns > Deta ils . To view additional information about the file online, select Options > Additional details . Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word, Quicksheet for Microsoft Exce l, Quickpoint for Microsoft PowerPoint, and Quickm anager for purchasing software . You can view Mi cr osoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.pp t) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. All file formats or feat ures are not supported. Work with files To open a file, scr oll to the correspo nding tab, select the file, and press the scroll key. To create a new file, select Options > New file > Quickwor d or Quicksheet . To sort files according to the type, select Options > Sort by . To view the details of a file, select Options > Details . The details include the name, size and location of the file, and the time and date when the file was last modified. To send files to a compatible device, select Op tions > Send and the s ending method. Nokia Team suite Select Menu > Office > Teams . With Nokia Team Sui te, you can create, edit, and delete teams, and send mes s ages, view te ams' web pages a nd communication history, and make phone calls to teams. 66 Nokia Office Tools
Work with teams To create a new team, select Options > Team > Create new . Giv e a name for the t eam and enter the conference call service information, if needed. Then select the members for the team. To select an action, first select the t eam to which you want to apply the acti on, then scroll to the action bar, and select the desired act ion. If you do not want to apply the act ion to all team members , open the team, and select the desired member s. Then select the action. To find more action s than are shown on the action bar, select Option s > Actions . The following actions are available: ⢠Call â Make a phone call to the team or selected team members. The team members are called one b y o n e a n d p u t o n h o l d u n til the calls can be merged into a conference call (netw ork serv ice) . Th e maximum number of partic ipants depends on the network service. ⢠Create message â Sen d a text message, a multimedia message, or an e-mail to the team or selected team members. ⢠Call conf erence servi ce â Start a call to the conference call service (network service) defined for the selected team. ⢠Communication log â View the communication log for the team or selected team members. ⢠Active not es â Write and read notes related to th e team. ⢠Team search â Search for content related to the team or select ed team members. ⢠Push t o talk â Communica te through push to talk (network service) with th e team or selected team members. ⢠Team Web bookm arks â Open the bookmark folder that contains t he team web pages. Edit teams To add team members, select Options > Members > Add . To remove team members, select Op tions > Members > Remove . To edit the details of a member, select Op tions > Members > Edit . To see to which tea ms a member belongs, se lect Option s > Members > Belongs to teams . Nokia Team Suite se ttings To select whether to see the team members' pictures on the display, select Options > Settings > View contact image . To define the plug-in settin gs, select Op tion s > Settings > Plug-i n settings . This setting is available only if there are plug-ins to configure. Action bar settings Select Option s > Settings > Action bar icons . To show action buttons in the action bar, select the desired actions. To hide ac tions, remove the selection. 67 Nokia Office Tools
To change the order of the action buttons, select an action, and Opt ions > Move up , Move down , Move to top , or Move to bottom . Tip: If you select not to show all actions in the action bar, you can sti ll access the actions by selecting Op tions > Actions . Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Conversion t ype t o op en a li st o f m ea su r es . S el e ct the measure to use, an d select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which t o convert, and select OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amo unt field changes automatically to show the con verted value. Set base curren cy and exchange rat e Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exchange rates because all previously s et exchange rates are cleared. Before you can mak e currency conversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exch ange for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select Options > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the ex change rate you would like to set per sing le unit of currency. 3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Sel ect Done > Yes to save the changes. After you have inserted all the nec essary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archi ve files to store compressed ZIP formatted fi les; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the ar chive password for protected 68 Nokia Office Tools
archives; an d change setting s, such as compression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive fi les on the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe Re ader . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; m odify setti ngs, such as zoom level and page views; and sen d PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can print a messag e or file from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a pr inter, or print to a file. You may not be able to print all messages, such as multimedia messag es or other specia l messages. Print files To configur e a printer for your device, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . To set the printer as the default printer, select Options > Set as default . Before you print, make sure your device is properly connected to the printer. To print a message or a file, select Optio ns > Print . To print to a file, select Optio ns > Printing options > Print to fi le , and determ ine the location for the file. To change th e printi ng options, select Options > Printing options . You can select the prin ter you want to use, the number of copi es and the range of pages you want to p r int. To change th e page layout before printing, select Option s > Printi ng options > Page setup . You can change the paper size a n d orientation, define the margins, an d insert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. To preview a file or message before you print, select Option s > Printing op tions > Previe w . Printing options Open a file or message, and select Options > Printing options . Define the follo wing options: ⢠Printer â Select an available print er from the list. ⢠Print â Select All page s , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copies â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to fil e â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. 69 Nokia Office Tools
Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Options > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â E nter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the access point. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the ho st. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orient ation â Se lect the orientation. ⢠Paper size â Select the paper size. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit al arms, or modify date an d time settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an alarm, select Options > Set alarm . When an alarm is active, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm fo r 5 minutes, s elect Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on an d starts sounding the alarm tone. If you selec t Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. S elect No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To chang e the alarm t ime, select Options > Reset alarm . To remove the alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Options > Add city . To change the city that determines the time a nd date in your device, select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the Clock main view, and the time in your device is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and m atches your time zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To chang e the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby modes, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . 70 Nokia Office Tools
To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zone inform ation to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-updat e . To change the ala rm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Not es . You can cr eate and send notes to other comp atible devices, and save received plain text files (.txt format) to Notes . Write a nd send notes To write a note, start en tering the text. The note editor opens automatically. To open a note, scroll to it, and press th e scroll key. To send a note to other compatible devices, select Option s > Send . To synchronise or t o define synchronisati on settings for a note, select Options > Synchron isation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. 71 Nokia Office Tools
Free time Your device contains a variety of media applications for both business and lei s ure time usage. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supports an im age capture resolution of up to 1600x1200 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use th e display as a viewfinder, aim at your subject, and press the scroll key. T he device saves the image in the default folder, or in the fo lder you have defined . Tip: To zoom in or out before taking a picture, scroll up or down. If you do not want to keep the captured image, select Optio ns > Delet e . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to capture another image. Select Options > Go to Galle ry to view the image in Gallery. If the light is dim, select Options > Night mo de before capturing an image. To adjust the image, select Opti ons > Adju st > White balance or Colour tone . To capture images in a sequence, select Op tions > Sequence mode . The camera captures six images in a row. To capture timed images, select Option s > Se lf- timer , s elect the desired time-out, and p ress Activate . The camera capt ures an image after the time- out has pa ssed. Tip: To access the various camera modes quickly, select Options > Show toolbar . To view the captured images, select Menu > Media > Gallery > Images . Record a video clip 1. Scroll to the video tab to activate the video recorder. 2. To start recording a video clip, press the scroll key. The remaining recording ti me is shown on the top of the display. 3. To pause the recording, select Pause ; to resume the recording, select Continue . 72 Free time
4. To stop the recording, select Stop . The device saves the clip in the default folder, or in the folder yo u have defined. 5. If you do not want to keep the saved video clip, select Option s > Dele te . Select Back to return to the viewfinder to record another video clip. Select Options > Play to view the video clip in the RealPlayer application. Camera settings Select Options > Settings . To adjust image quality, to select whether images remain on the display after captu ring them, and to change resolution, default name, or memory in which to save your new images, select Imag e . To change th e length, resolution, and default name of the videos you record or th e memory in which t o save them, select Video . Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, music, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all received music and sounds are automatically saved to Gallery. Soun d clips are opened in the Music pl ayer, and video clips and streaming links in the RealPlayer app lication. Ima ges are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, sc roll to it, and press the scroll key. To create a new folder, select a file and then select Option s > Organise > New folder . You cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Copy t o memor y car d , Copy to ph one mem. , or Mov e to phone mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , Downld. tracks , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files th at match the search are shown. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Optio ns > Open . To open the next or previou s image for viewing, scroll right or left. To enlarge the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, select Zoom out . 73 Free time
To view the image in full screen size, select Optio ns > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Options > Normal screen . To rotate the image, select Op tions > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rotate the im age counterclockwise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed information about the image, select Optio ns > View details . To send the image, select Op tions > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the ima ge, s ele ct Options > Rename . To set the image as the display background , select Optio ns > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, s elect Options > Add to cont act . The Contacts app lication o pens, and y ou can select the cont act for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > Real Player . RealPlayer play s video clips and audio files that a re stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported formats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not streamin g), 3 GP, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. Re alPlayer does not necessarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Sav ed clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streamin g media, select a web link that points to a clip, and select Pl ay ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: a n rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that poin ts to a RAM file. B efore the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network connection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automati cally to recon nect to the intern et access p oint. To adjust the v o lume duri ng playback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during playback, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playba ck or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connectin g to the streaming site stops, t he playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. 74 Free time
To download video clips from the web, select Option s > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Option s > Play in full screen . Full s creen increases the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspe ct ratio is mainta ined. Tip: To swi tch between the normal screen and full screen quickly, press 2 on the keypad. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, s elect Option s > Send . Selec t the sending method. To send a media clip inside a message , create a multimedia mess age, select a clip to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web link, select Optio n s > Clip de tails . Information may include for example the bit r ate or the internet link of a streaming file. To set on file protection for a media clip, select Option s > Clip deta ils > Status > Options > Change . File protection prevents others from changing a file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Op tions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Music player Select Menu > Media > Music player . With Music player, you can pl ay music files, and create and listen to track lists. Music player su pports files with extensions su ch as MP3 and AAC. Listen to music Warning: List en to mus ic at a mo derate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage yo ur hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To select a musi c track, select Opti ons > Music library . All tracks lists all music on your device. To view sorted song s, select Album s , Artists, Genres , or Composers . To play t he track, s elect Options > Play . To p a use the playing, scroll to and press the scroll key. To fast-forward or rewind the track, scroll up or down and hold. To sel ect the prev ious or nex t trac k, scr oll up o r down . 75 Free time
To control the music volume, scroll right or left. To mute the volume, scroll left until the volume is muted. To stop a track, scroll to and press the scroll key. To play the m usic tr acks repeatedly, s elect Options > Loop . Select All to repeat all the tracks in the current folde r, One to repeat the selected t rack, or Off to s et off the repeating. To play music in random or der, select a folder and Optio ns > Rando m play . After you have added or re moved music files in the device, update your music library. Select Options > Update Musi c library . Music player sea rches the device memory for music files and updat es them to the music library. To view music track inform ation, select Options > View details . Track lists You can create a new track list and add tracks to it, or edit a saved track list. To create a new track list, se lect Options > Music library > Track list s > Opti ons > Ne w track list . To add a track to a track list, open th e track list, an d select Options > Add tracks . Music categories To view music categories, select Music library > Artists , Albums , Genres , or Composers . To play all music tracks from a subcategory, scroll to a subcategory, and s elect Options > Play . To view all tracks th at belong to a s ubcategor y, scroll to the subcategory, an d press the scroll key. To add all music tracks from a specific subcategory to a new, saved, or the current ly playing track list, select Optio ns > Add to track list . To delete all tracks from a category or subcategory, select Options > Delete . Preset frequency settings Select Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency setting you want to use, and select Optio ns > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Optio ns > Edi t , select a frequency band, and scro ll up or down to increase or decrease its value. You hear your frequency adjust ment imme diately in the playback. To reset the frequency b ands to their original values, select Options > Reset to default s . To cr eate your own freq uency sett ing, select Options > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequ ency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands and s et the frequency on each ba nd. Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . 76 Free time
With Recorder, you can reco rd up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play the sound clip. Reco rder suppor ts the AMR file format. You can also pr ess the voice key to open the Recorder application. I f you have logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a p ush-to-talk key and does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pa use to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording T o l i s t e n t o t h e s o u n d c l i p t h a t y o u j u s t r e c o r d e d , s e l e c t Play . The progress bar di splays the playi ng time, position, and length of the clip. Select Stop to cancel the playback. To pause the playback of a recorded clip, select Pause . Playback resumes when you select Play . Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you ch ange the default location. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the setti ngs are affected. To change the defau lt location of saved recording s, select Option s > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Recording q uality . Tip: Waveform files (.wav) are a more common audio file format, but adaptive multirate files (.amr) are smaller for co mparable sound quality. Instant messaging Select Menu > Connectivity > IM . Instant messag ing (IM) (network service) allows you to converse with other peop le using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service prov iders maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you regi ster to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in th e menu of your device. Con tact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs of services. For more information on IM settings, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the setti ngs manually. 77 Free time
Define IM settings To define the IM application settings, select Options > Settings > IM settin gs . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones. To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM conta cts, you must log into an instant messaging serv er. To add an I M server, select Optio ns > Sett ings > Server setti ngs > Servers . Ask your service provider for the correct set tings. To set the server as the one to which your device automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Server s ettings > Defau lt server . To define how your device connects to the IM server, select Options > Settings > Server s ettings > IM login ty pe . To establis h a connection between your device and the default server au tomatically, select Automati c . To automate the connection only when in your home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the server when you open the IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into th e server in the IM main view by selecting Op tions > Log in . E n t e r y o u r u s e r I D a n d p a s s w o r d a t t h e p r o m p t . Y o u c a n obtain the user name, password, and other setti ngs to log in from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for I M users and us er IDs, sele ct IM contacts > Options > New IM contact > Search . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phon e numbe r , a nd E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversation, enter your message, and select Options > Send . To return to the conversa tions list with out closing the conversation, select Bac k . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a new convers ation, select Options > New conversation . You can start a new con versation with a contact while you are insi de an active conversat ion. However, you cann ot have two activ e conversations with the same con tact. To insert an image to an i n stant message, select Optio ns > Send image , an d select the imag e you want to send. To save a convers ation participant to y our IM contacts, select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conv ersation view, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a text file tha t can be opened and viewed in the Notes application . IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . 78 Free time
To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scr oll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, a nd select Options > Send . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for whi ch you know the group ID, select Opt ions > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opti ons > Leave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Options > Sear ch . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To add an IM user to the group, select Optio ns > Add member . Select a user from your IM conta cts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Option s > Remove . To provide members with editing rights to the group, select Option s > Add editor . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit grou p settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. To remove editing rights from a group member, select Option s > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Option s > Ad d to banne d list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of th e user. To allow a banned user t o join the group, se lect Option s > Remove . Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking option s > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Matching nam es appear in a list. To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user, select Option s > Unblock . To prevent receiving messag es from other IM users, select Option s > Block ne w contacts . Se lect the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Optio ns > Settings > IM s ettings and define the following settings: ⢠Use s creen na me â To change th e name that identifies you in IM groups, select Yes . ⢠Show my availability â Select whether you allow all other IM users or only your IM contacts to see when you are online. Select To no-one to hide your online status . ⢠Allow mes sages from â Select to receive instant messages from all other IM users, your IM co ntacts only, or not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow invitations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling spee d â To decrease or increase the speed at which new messages a re displayed, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â Select to list your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. 79 Free time
⢠Availability reloading â To update the online status of your IM contacts a utomatically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline c ontacts â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts list. ⢠Own message colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date / time info â Select Yes to view the receiving or sending time of eac h mes sag e in a n IM conversation. ⢠IM alert tone â Select the tone that is played when you receive a new instant message. Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, yo u can view, play, and in teract with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash files To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the sc roll key. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash fi les saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the play back of so me flash files may appear uneven and slow due to their original settin gs. Change the quality setting of su ch files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your fla sh files, select Options > Organi se . Visual radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than t h e wireless dev ice antenna. At tach a compatible headset or enhancement to the de vice for the FM radio to function prop erly. Listen to th e radio Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. C o n t i n u o u s e x p o s u r e t o h i g h v o l u m e m a y d a m a g e y o u r hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To searc h for a station, s elect or . To set the frequency manually, select Option s > Manual tuning . To view av ailable stations based on location, select Optio ns > Station dire ctory (netwo rk service). 80 Free time
To save the curren t station to your st ation list, select Option s > Save st ation . To select a previously saved radio station, select or . To adjust the volume, us e the volume keys. To switch from headset use to listen ing to the radio through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To return to the sta ndby mode and leave the FM radio playing in the ba ckground, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availa bility and costs, and t o subscribe t o the service, contact your service provider. Before you ca n view visu al conten t, you mu st have an internet access point defined at Me nu > Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Access points . 1. To view availa ble visual co ntent for a tuned st ation, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID ha s not been save d for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to search f or it in the station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nearest to you from the station d i r e c t o r y . I f y o u r d e v i c e f i n d s a s t a t i o n t h a t m a t c h e s the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visu al content, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your saved st ations, select Option s > Stati ons . To listen to a saved station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available v isual cont ent for a st ation with th e Visual Radio service, sele ct Options > Station > Start visual service . To change th e station details , select Options > Station > Edit . Visual Radio settings Select Option s > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up tone â Select whether a tone is played when the application is st arted. ⢠Auto-start service â Select Yes to have the Visual Radio service st art automatically when you se lect a saved station tha t offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. Y ou do not need an access poi nt to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. ⢠Current region â Select the region you are currently located in. This se tting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was st arted. Push to talk Select Menu > Connectivity > PTT . 81 Free time
Push to talk (PTT ) (network service) provides direct voice communication connecte d with th e push of a key. With PTT, you can us e your dev ice as a wa lkie-talkie. You can use PTT to have a conv ersation with one per son or with a gro up of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you ca n call the channel to see if anyone is online. The channel call does not alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start speaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen th rough the built-in loudspeaker. Users take tu rns responding to each other. Because only one user can talk at a time, the maximu m duration of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Opt ions > Settings and select User set tings to define your preferences for PT T, or Connecti on settings to change the conn ection details. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may also receive the sett ings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT servic e If you have set Applicatio n start-up on in User settings , PTT automa tically logs in to the service when started. If not, you must log in manually. To log in to the PTT se rvice manually, select Opti ons > Switch PTT on . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep o nce or Silent , or there is an ongoing phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, becaus e the volume may be extremely loud. To make a PTT call, select Optio ns > PTT cont acts , select one or several contac ts from the li st, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can see the display. The display informs you when it is your turn to speak. Speak towards the microph one, and do not cover the loudspeaker with your ha nds. Press and hold the voice key the entire time you ar e talking. When you have finished talking, release th e key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT c all, press the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT log > Created calls , and a call. To make a PTT c all to a c ontact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To send a request to a contact to call you, select Optio ns > Send callback request . 82 Free time
To crea te a contact , select Options > Add to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, selec t Option s > PTT contacts . A list of nam es from the Contacts application is displayed with information about their login stat us. To call a selected contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, select several contacts and Option s > Make PTT group call . To send the contact a request to call you, select Option s > Send call back request . To answer a callback reques t, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PTT call to the sender, press the voice key. Create a PTT channel To crea te a channel, select Options > New channel > Create new . To register the channel to the PTT service, s elect Option s > Register . To join a channel, select th e channel you want to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a chan nel, select Options > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a chan nel, select Option s > Active members . To view more information ab out a selected user, select Option s > Contact details . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were active when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exit PTT, select Option s > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the background. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning Syst em (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellite s and their ground sta tions that monitor the operation of th e satellites. To use GPS, you need a compatible GPS receiver. Use Bluetooth con nectivity to connect to th e GPS receiver. To start usin g a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity, select Connectivit y > Bluetooth . A GPS terminal receives lo w-power radio signals from the satellites and meas ures the travel time of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. 83 Free time
The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible fo r its accura cy an d maint enance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS sa tellites made by the Uni ted States government and is subject to chang e with the Uni ted States Departme nt of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Pl an. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacle s, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver sh ould only be used ou tdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable different positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Positionin g > Posit ioning method s . About satelli te signals If yo ur de vice canno t find the s atel lite s igna l, cons ider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠If the weather conditions ar e bad, the signal strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minu tes. Satellite status To check how many satellites y our device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signal s, select Menu > Tools > GPS data > Position > Optio ns > Satellite stat us . If yo ur device h as found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in th e satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. W hen your device has receive d enough data from the s atellite signal to ca lculate the coordinates of your loc ation, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculat e the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to contin ue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Positi oning . To use a specific position ing me thod to detect the location of your device, select P ositioning metho ds . To select a positionin g server, se lect Positioning server . 84 Free time
Nokia Maps Select Menu > Tools > Maps . With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one loca tion to another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by -turn n aviga tion service with voice guidance. When you use Maps for the firs t time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloading map information for your curren t location. To change the access point late r, select Op tions > Settings > Network > Default acce ss point . Download maps When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another coun try, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloa ding may involve the tra nsmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, cont act your service provider. You can view the amount of transferred da ta from the data counter (kB) shown on th e display. The cou nter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or se arc h for locations online. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select Optio ns > Settings > Network > Use network > Off . To receive a note when your device registers to a network outside your home cellular network, select Option s > Sett ings > Network > Roaming warning > On . Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. To adjust the size of the cache that is used for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Options > Settings > Network > Max. memory card use (%) . This option is availabl e only when a compatible memory card is inserted. Wh en the memory is full, the oldest map data is dele ted. The cache cannot be emptied. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader i s PC software that you can use to download and install maps for different countries from the internet to your devi ce or a compatible memory card. You can a lso use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, download it from www.nokia.com/ma ps, and install it to a compatible PC. You must use Nokia Maps before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to check the version of map data to be downloaded. 85 Free time
1. To download maps or voice guidance files with Nokia Map Loader, connect your device to t he PC with a compatible USB data cable. 2. Open Nokia M ap Loader in yo ur PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want to install to your device. Satell ite information The indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, the circles are yellow and the icon is blinking. When the device receives enough data from the satellites to calculat e the coordinates of your current location, the icon stops blinking and turns green. To check how many satellites y our device found and whether your device is rece iving satellite signals from the satellites, select Optio ns > Map options > Satellite info . If your device found satelli tes, a bar is shown for each satellite in the satellite information vi ew. The longer the bar, the stronger the s atellite signal. When your device has received enough data from th e satellite signal to calculate the coordi nates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must re ceive si gnals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continu e calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Browse map s The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that wa s saved from your la st session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you are in based on the info rmation the device receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not been downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Opti ons > Find place > GPS posit ion [0] . Your current location is indicated on the map with . To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch between the 2-D and 3-D views, select Optio ns > Map options > 2D/3D . To find a location, select Options > Find place . To use a location on the map, for example, as a sta rting point for a n earby search, t o plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the desired option. To define what kinds of p oints of interest are shown on the map, sel ect Options > Map options > Categories . 86 Free time
To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As image . The scr een shot is saved in Gallery. To save a location as a la ndmark, press the scroll key and select Save > As landmar k . To view saved landmarks, select Options > Find place > Landmark s . To send a landmark to a compatible device, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you se nd the landm ark in a text message, the i n formation is converted to plain text. To adjust the network, routing, and general setting s, select Option s > Settings . Find a place To view points of interest near your cur rent location or other locations on the map, select Opti ons > Find place > Nearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Option s > Find place > Keyword search , or start entering the first letters of t he name, and select Fi nd . To search for a location by ad dress, select Opti ons > Find place > By address . You must enter the city and country. To use an ad dress you have s aved to a co ntact card in Contacts, select Opt ions > Find p lace > By address > Optio ns > Select from con tacts . To view the search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To view a list of your p revious location s, select Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route 1. Scroll to a point on the ma p, press the scroll key, and select Route fro m . 2. Scroll to Select , and select Options > Sele ct . To adjust the routing settin gs, such as the mode of transportation, se lect Optio ns > Settings > Routing . 3. To select the desti n ation, scroll to To , and select Optio ns > Sele ct . 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options > Show route . The route is calculat ed using the selected routing settings. To view the itinerary ro ute on the map, select Option s > Show on map . To run a simulation of the route, select Options > Start simulation . Navigation To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance to use in M aps, selec t Options > Extra services > Add navig ation . The licence yo u purchase is device-specific and cannot be transferred from your device to another device. After purch asing the n avigat ion upgrade, the service is available through M aps. When you use nav igation for the first time, you are prompted to select the lang uage of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected language. To chan ge the language later, select Option s > Sett ings > General > Voice guidance . 87 Free time
To navigate to a desti nat ion using voice guidance, create a route in Maps , and select Option s > Start navig ation . You can also start navigat ion by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navig ate to . To discard the created route and use another route, select Options > Alternative route . To view only the next turn s and hide the map, se lect Optio ns > Map opti ons > Next turns . To stop navigation, select Options > Stop navig ation . Guides To purchase and download guides, select Opt ions > Extra services > Guides . The guides provide information about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of intere st. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. The licence you purchase is device-specifi c and cannot be transferred from your device to another device. To downlo ad a new gu ide to yo ur device, scroll to t he nearest guides or all guides tab, select the desired guide, and OK . The purchase pr ocess starts automatically. You ca n pay for the guides t hrough a credit card or have the amount charged to your phone bill, if supported by your cellular network service provider. To confirm the purchase, select OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purcha se through e-mai l, enter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . To browse a downloaded guide, scroll to the my guides tab, select a g uide and a s ubcategory, if available. GPS data Select Menu > Tools > GPS data . With GPS data, y ou can view your current location, find your way to a desired location, and tra ck distance. Select Navigation to view navigati ng information to your trip destination, Position to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your travelling information such as the distance and du ration you have travelled, and your average and maximum speeds. The application must rece iv e positioning information from at least three satellites to be used as a travelling aid. The tri p meter has limit e d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qu ality of GPS sig nals. Use GPS da ta To check the signal streng th of the satellites that provide the positioning information necessary for navigation, open any of the three views and select Optio ns > Satellite stat us . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destinat ion . You can also enter the destin ation latitude and longitude coordinates. 88 Free time
To remove the destination set for your trip, select Navigation > Options > Stop navigation . To save your current position as a landmark, select Navigation or Pos ition , and Options > Save positio n . To activate the trip meter, se lect Trip dist . > Option s > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Option s > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculating the trip again, select Trip dist. > Opti ons > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, select Option s > Sett ings > Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the posit ioning satellit es, select Option s > Sett ings > Altitude calibration . Landmarks Select Menu > Tools > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordinates to geographic locations that you can save to your device for later use in different location-based services. You can create landmarks using a Bluetooth GPS accessory or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, selec t Optio ns > New landmark . Select Current posi tion to make a network request for the latitude and longit ude coordinates of your current location, Use map to select the lo cation from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary location information such as a name, category, address, lati tude, longitude, a nd altitude. To show the landmark on the map, select Options > Show on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Optio ns > Edi t > Option s and from the following: ⢠Select categories â Organise the landma rk to a group of similar landmark s. Select a categ ory to modify landmark inform ation such as a name, category, address , latitude, longit ude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve current positi on â Request and automatically fill in the geographical latitude and longitude coo rdinates t o make a landmark of you r curre nt locatio n. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Land mark ico n â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the landmark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices . ⢠Editin g options â Edit the p hone numbers and URL addresses assign ed to the landmark. ⢠Writing l anguage â Change the writing langua ge. Landmark categories You can see the landmark cate gories in two views: one lists catego ries that already contain landma rks, and the other li sts all the categories your de vice has. 89 Free time
To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category, and press the scroll key. To create a new category, select Option s > Ed it categories > Options > New category . To move a landmark from one category to another, open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and Optio ns > Add to category . Select the old category to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or categories to which you wa nt to add the landma rk. Select Accept . Receive landmarks Select Menu > Messaging . Open a message that contain s a landmark you have received from another device. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Optio ns > Save . To forward the landma rk to compatible devices, select Optio ns > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Optio ns > Show on map . To find out how to navigate t o the received landmark, select Options > Show route . 90 Free time
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corpora te intranet, or to another dev ice or computer. Fast downloading High-sp eed downlink packet acce ss (HS DPA, a lso cal led 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and th e device is connected t o a UMTS network th at supports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e- mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HS DPA connection is in dicated by . The icon may vary between regions. You can activat e or deactivate s upport for HSDP A in the device settings. For availability and s ubscription to data connect ion services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the down load speed; sending data to the netw ork, such a s messag es and e-mail, i s not affected. Nokia PC Suite You can install Nokia PC Suit e from the CD-ROM or from the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and W indows Vista. With Nokia PC Suite, yo u can make ba ckups, sync hronise your device with a compatible computer, move files between your device and a compatible computer, or use yo ur device as a modem. For more information about Nokia PC Suite, s ee the Nokia PC Suit e guide. Data cable Select Menu > Connectivity > USB . Using a U SB data cable, yo u can connect your device to a compatible comput er. Install N okia PC Suite to your computer before you use a cable connection, as Nokia PC Suite automatica lly installs the USB data cable driver to your computer. You can u se the Data transfer mode without installing the USB data cable drivers. Connect the cable to the USB connector of the device. To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable, select USB mode > PC Suite or Da ta transfer . 91 Connectivi ty
To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, select As k on connection > Yes . Transfer data fro m a computer 1. Make sure that you have selected USB as a connection typ e in the Manage conn ections settings in Nokia PC Suite. 2. Insert a memory card to your device and connect the device to a compatible computer with t he USB data cable. 3. When the device asks which mode is used, select Data transfer . I n this m ode, y ou can see you r device as a removable hard drive in your co mputer. 4. End the connection from the computer (for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card. Infrared Do not point th e infrared (IR) beam at anyone's eye or allow it to interfere with ot her IR devices. This device is a Clas s 1 laser product . Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer da ta such as business cards, ca lendar notes, and media files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more important than the an gle or distance. 2. Sel ect Menu > Connectivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on th e other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Optio ns > Send > Via infrared . If the data tran sfer is not starte d within 1 minute after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through in frared are plac ed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devi ces away from each other breaks the connection, but the infr ared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivates. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth . About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology en ab les wireless connections between electronic devices wi thin a range o f 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluet ooth connection can be used to send images, videos, tex t, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that u s e Bluetooth technology. Since devices using Bluetooth t echnology communicate using radio wave s, your device and th e other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, al though the connection can 92 Connectivi ty
be subject to interference fro m obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetoot h connections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anoth er compatible device at the same time. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles: Dial-up Networking Profile, Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Handsfree Profile, Headset Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, SIM Access Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile, Generic Access Profile, Generic Audio/ Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distributi on Profile, and Audio/ Video Remote Control Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting B luetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other de vices to determine th eir compatibi lity with this device. Features us ing Bluet ooth technolo gy increase t he demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Give your device a uni que n ame t o mak e it easy to reco gni se if there are several Bluetoot h devices in the vicinity. 2. Select Bluetooth > On . 3. Select My phone's visib ility > Shown to all or Define perio d . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluet o oth technology. 4. Open the application wh ere the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item, and select Options > Send > Via Blueto oth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you ha ve sent data using B luetooth before, a list of the pr evious se arch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More d evices . 6. Select the devi ce with which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been establis hed, Sendin g data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store message s sent usin g Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluetooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visib ility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device o r Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Bluetoot h, a tone sounds, a nd you are asked if y o u want to accept the messa ge in which the data is in cluded. If you accept, t he mess age is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. 93 Connectivi ty
Tip: You can ac cess the files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite a nd some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1-16 digits), and agree with the user of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not have a user interface have a fi xed p asscode. You need the p asscode only when you connect the devices for the first time. After pair ing , it is poss ible to authorise the connection. Pairing and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept the connection betw een paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. 1. Sel ect Options > New paired device . The device starts to search for Bluetoot h devices within range. If you have sent da ta using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displa yed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same pa sscode mus t be entered to the other device as well. 3. Sel ect Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection at tempt is made. After pa iring, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a n ickname to the paired dev ice, select Optio ns > Assign shor t name . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device wh ose pair ing you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Op tions > Del ete all . If you a re currently connected to a devi ce and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immedia tely, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automa tically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and th e other device can be made without your knowledge. No separa te acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this stat us for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unauth oris ed . To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or hea dse t, you need to pair your device with the enhancem ent. See the enhancement user guide for the passcod e and further instructions. To connect to the audio en hancemen t, switch on th e enhancement. Some aud io enhancements connect automati cally to yo ur device. Ot herwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device . 94 Connectivi ty
Security tips When you a re not u sing Blu etooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you do not need a sep arate SIM card to access SIM card data an d connect to the GSM netw ork. To use the SIM access pro file, you need the follo wing: ⢠Compatible car kit device that suppor ts Blueto oth wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compat ible connected enhancement, such as a car ki t, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers progra mmed into yo ur device, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you must first leave the remo te SIM mode. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to unloc k it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profi le 1. Select Menu > Conne ctivity > Bl uetooth > Remote SIM mod e > On . 2. Activate Blu etooth in th e car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a search for compatible devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible devic es. 5. To pair the devices , enter the Bluetooth pass code shown on the displa y of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the active user profile, the car kit searches automatically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your device, and automatic authorisati on is activated, the car kit automatically connects to the GSM network when you switch on the car ignition. When you a ctivate th e remote SIM access pro file, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between your device and the ca r kit without separate acceptance or authoris ation, select Menu > Connectivity > Blu etoot h , and open the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, p ress the scroll key, and enter t he Bluetooth passcode. When the device asks to make th e connection a utomatic, s elect Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM acce ss connec tion from your device, select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > Off . 95 Connectivi ty
Wireless LAN Some places, like France, ha ve restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local area network (WLAN ). To use WLAN, a network must be available in the location and your device must be connected to it. WLAN connections Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increas e the security of your wireless LAN connection. Usin g encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must create an internet access poin t in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the inte rnet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. T he active WLAN connection is ended when you end the da ta connection. You can a lso end the connect ion manually. See "Connection manager," p. 10 0 . You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. Y ou can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several app lications can use the same internet ac cess point. When the device is in the Offline profile, you can still use WLAN, if availa ble. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN connection. If you move the device to another location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN acce ss point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect y our device to another access point that belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you rema in within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can stay con nected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address that identi fies your device, for example to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#62209526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN ava ilability, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. Tip: You can also sca n fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . The WLAN wiza rd helps you find and connect to a wireless LAN. When you op en the application, your device starts to scan for available WLAN s and lists them. 96 Connectivi ty
To update the list of available WL ANs, select Options > Refres h . To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, s croll to the desired network, and select Options > Start Web br owsing or Co nt. Web browsing . To disconnect the active connection to the W LAN, select Option s > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN , select Options > Details . To save the access point of the WLAN, select Options > Define access point . Always enable one of the av ailable encryption methods to increase the security of your WLAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your d ata. Use the wiz ard in the acti ve standby mode In the active standby mode, the WL AN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the availa ble options, scroll to the row showing the status , and press th e scroll key. Depending on the s tatus, you can st art the Web browser using a WLAN connection, disconnect from a WLAN, se arch for WLA Ns, or set the n etwork scanning on or off. If WLAN scannin g is off and you are not connected to any WLAN , WLAN scanning off is displayed in the active standby mode. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs , scroll to the row showing th e status, and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll ke y, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN sca nning off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start Web browsing is selected, the WLAN wizard automati cally creates an access point for the selected WLAN. Th e access point can al so be used with other applications requiring WLAN connection. If you select a secu red WLAN, you a re asked to ente r the relevant passcodes. T o connect to a hidden network, yo u must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connecti on to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your s ervice p rovid er, and you may no t be able to create, edit, or remove them. 97 Connectivi ty
Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Sel ect Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . 2. Sel ect Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Opti ons > Duplicate access point to us e the access point as a basis for the n ew one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packe t data . ⢠Access point name â Enter the name for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User n ame â Enter your user name if required by the service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Promp t passwor d â Select Yes to enter your password each time you log into a server or No to save the password in your device memory and automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case- sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authentica tion â Select Se cure to send your password always encryp ted, or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page wh en you use this access point. 4. After defining the settings, select Options > Advanced settings to define the advanced settings or Back to save the setting s and exit. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (G PRS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Access points . After setting up a basic inte rnet access point for packet data (GP R S), sele ct Options > Advanced setti ngs , and define the follow ing advanced settings: ⢠Network type â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as th e internet protocol type. The internet protocol defi nes how data is trans ferred to an d from your devic e. ⢠Phone IP address â Enter the I P address of your device. Select Autom atic to have the network provide the device IP address. This setting is sho wn only if you select Network type > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresses, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided automatically. ⢠Proxy s e rver address â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide 98 Connectivi ty
additional security a nd speed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . 2. Select Optio ns > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wireless LAN . ⢠WLAN network name â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), th at is, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To select the network from the WLANs in ra nge, select Search for networks . ⢠Netwo rk status â Select Hidden if the network you are connect ing to is hi dden or Public if it is not hidden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastr ucture , devices can communicate with each other and with wi red LAN devices through a WLAN acce ss point. If you select Ad-ho c , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLA N access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You mu st select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected access), you must a lso configure the relevant additional settings. See the device help for more information. ⢠WLAN se curity setti ngs â Edit the security settings for the se lected securit y mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access point automatically, use the WLAN wiza rd. Selec t Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WL AN Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, select Option s > Advanced settings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. ⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel i s usually chosen automatically. To enter the ch annel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . 99 Connectivi ty
⢠Proxy serv er address â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy server port number. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compati ble computer, you can u se your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use yo ur device as a modem ⢠You need an approp riate data communi cations software on your computer , such as Nokia P C Suite. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropriate network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriate drivers installed on your computer. You must install drivers for the cable connection, and you may need to install or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible computer using infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infr ared ports of the device and computer are directly facing each other with no obstacles between them. To connect your device to a computer using Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To act ivate Bluetooth in your device, select Menu > Connectivit y > Bluet ooth an d select Blueto oth > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to us e some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Acti ve data connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a conn ection from the list and Optio ns > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected network connection, select Optio ns > Disconnect . To end all active network connections simultaneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs available within range, select Available WLAN netw orks . The available W LANs are listed with their network mo de (infrastructure or ad - hoc), signal strength, and network encrypti on 100 Connectivi ty
indicators, and whether your device has an active connection with the network. To view the details of a net work, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Option s > Define acce ss point . 101 Connectivi ty
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, an d take care of the security of th e devic e and i ts conten ts. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionalit y could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functi oning . Lock the device Important: If the device has been lock ed, enter the lock code to activate the phone fu nction. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise th e number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock the device in the standby mode. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock code is 12345. To unlock, press the left selection key, enter your lock code, and press the scroll key. To change the lock code, select Me nu > Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Security > Phone and SI M card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alph abets and digits can be used, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabet s are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Allow remote lock > Yes . Enter the remote loc k messag e and confir m the messag e. The message m ust be at least 5 characters long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory card with a password to prevent unauthorised acce ss. To set a password, se lect Optio ns > Set passwo rd . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive. The password is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, 102 Security and data m anagem ent
you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Option s > Remove passwo rd . When you remove the password, the data on th e memor y card is not protected again st unauthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Options > Unloc k memory car d . Enter the p assword. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which cas e the card is unlocked and password removed. Formatting a memory card de stroys all data stored on the card. Fixed dialling Select Menu > Contacts > Op tion s > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling serv ice, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dialli ng service. Contact your service provider for more information. When fixed dialling is acti vated, calls ma y be poss ible to the official emergency number programmed into your d evice. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Options > New SIM contact and enter the contact name a nd phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Contacts to copy the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country prefix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phon e numbers to which calls ar e allowed must start with this country prefix. 2. Select Opt ions > Activate fixed d ialling . Yo u need your PIN2 code to activate and deactiv ate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To canc el the service, select Optio ns > Deactivate fix ed dialling . Tip: To send text messages to th e SIM contacts while the fixed dialling service is active, you need to add the text mess age centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security > Certificate manage ment . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guarantee safety. There are three different types of certificates: authority certificates, personal certificates, and se rve r certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certificate stored on your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct cert ific ate in your devi ce. Download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as an e-ma il attachment, or as a message sent through a Bluetooth or infrared conne ction. Certificates should be used when you connect to an online bank or a remote server to transfer confi dential 103 Security and data m anagem ent
information. They should also be used if you w ant to reduce the risk of viruse s or other malicious software, and to check the authentici ty of software when you download and install soft ware to your device. Tip: When you a dd a new ce rtificate, check its authenticity. View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the va lidity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, select View d etails . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not trusted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. You may want to change th e trust sett ings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate no t valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the se lected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certific ate cannot be used. Contact th e certificate issuer. Certificate trust settings Trusting a certificate means that you authoris e it to verify web pages, e-mail se rvers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to verify services and software. Impor tant: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and softw are installation considerably sm aller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; th e certificate manager must contain correct, authentic , or trusted certificates for increased security to be avai lable. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Exp ired certificate" or "Certifica te not valid yet" is shown, ev en if the certificate should be valid, check that th e current date and time in you r device are correct. To chang e the trust settings , select a certificat e and Optio ns > Trust settings . Select an application field and press the scroll key to select Yes or No . Y ou cannot change the trus t settings of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Intern et â E-mail and graphics . ⢠App. installat ion â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Security > Security module . 104 Security and data m anagem ent
View and edit security modules To view or edit a security module, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security mo dule, select Option s > Security deta ils . To edit the PIN codes for the s ecurity module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digi tal signatures. You may not be able to change these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of th e security module. To delete the key store, select Key store , select the desired key store, and Op tions > Delete . You may no t be able to d elete the key sto re of all security modu les. Back up data I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o b a c k u p d e v i c e m e m o r y r e g u l a r l y to the memory card or a compa tible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory ca rd, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Option s > Back up ph one memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Option s > Restore f rom card . You can also connect your device to a compatible computer and use Nokia PC Suite to back up data. Remote configuration Select Menu > T ools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage settings , data, and software on your device remotely. You can conn ect to a server, and receiv e configuratio n settings for your device. You may receive server profil es and different configuration settings from your service providers or company information manage ment department. Configuration set tings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device . The available options may vary. The remote configuration conn ection is usually started by the server when the de vice setti ngs need to be updated. To create a new server pr ofile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration me ssage. If not, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for th e configuration server. ⢠Serve r ID â Enter th e unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server p assword â Enter a password to identi fy your device to the server. ⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You 105 Security and data m anagem ent
can also choose to be as ked for the access point every time you start a connection . ⢠Host address â Enter the web address o f the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User na me â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. ⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuration â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all requests â Select Yes i f y o u d o n o t want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network authen tication â Select whet her to use http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. ⢠Network user name â Enter your user ID for the http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. ⢠Network password â Enter your password for the http authenti cation. This s e tting is available only if you have selected internet as the bearer type. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for you r device, se lect Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Application manager Select Menu > Installati ons > App. mgr. . You can install two typ es of applications and software on your devi ce: ⢠Applications and softwa re sp ecifically intended for your device or compatible wi th the Symbian operating system. These sof tware installation files have the extension .sis or .sisx. ⢠J2ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbian operating system. The Java application installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compat ible comp uter, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mai l attachment, or with Bluetooth. During the installa tion, the device checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device ma y increase w hen you use these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installat ion file and install it immediately . Note, however, th at the connection runs in the background during th e installation. 106 Security and data m anagem ent
Install applications Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbia n Signe d or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download applications . Select the application and Option s > Install . To view the details of an inst alled software package, select the app lication and Optio n s > View details . To view the installation log, select Options > View log . A list shows what software has been installed and removed, and the date of th e installation or removal. If you encounter problems with the device after installing a software package, use this list to find out which software package ma y be the cause of the problem. The information in th is list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that are incomp atible with each other. To remove software, select Optio ns > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinstall it by using the original software package file, or by restoring a full backup that con t ains the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you ma y no longer be able to open files created with that softwar e. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software p ackage may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installation s ettings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Delete â The software packag e installation file is deleted from the device afte r the installation. If you download software packages using the Web browser, this may help reduce the amount of storage space required. If you want to store the software package file for possible reinstalla tion, do not select this option, or make sure that you ha ve a copy of the software package file stored on a compat ible co mpute r or on a CD-ROM. ⢠Select language: â If the soft ware package contains several langua ge versions of the softwar e, select th e language version that yo u want t o insta ll. ⢠Type â Specify what kind of applications you want installed. You may ch oose to install only applications with vali dated certificates. This setting applies only to Symbian operating syst em applications (.sis or .sisx files). Java security settings To specify security se ttings for a Java applicat ion, select Option s > Sett ings . You can define which funct ions the Java app lication can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the protection domain of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an acce ss point that the application may use wh en ma king network connections. 107 Security and data m anagem ent
⢠Network access â Allow the application to create a data connection to the ne twork. ⢠Messaging â Allow the applicat ion to send messages. ⢠Applicatio n auto-sta rt â Allow the application to start autom atically. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the applica tion to activate a data connection, such as a Bluetooth connection. ⢠Multimedia â Allow the application to use t he multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user d ata â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, con tacts, or any ot her personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the app lication to add personal data, such as en tries to Contacts. ⢠Positi oning â Allow the ap plication to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landmarks â Allow the application to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are promp ted to confirm the Java appl ication's access t o the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every t ime â Require the Java application to ask for your conf irmation each time it uses the functionality. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â A llow the Java application to use the functionality with out your confirmation. The security se ttings help prote ct your dev ice against harmful Ja va applications th at may use the functions of your device wit hout your permission. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthines s of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java application from using the fu nctionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as images, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usa ge rights. The activat ion keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with some acti vation keys you may listen to a music track only a limited number of ti mes. During one playback session you ma y rewind, fast-forward, or pause the track, but once you stop i t, you have u sed one of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital right s management (D RM) protected content comes with an as sociated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation key s and the content, use t he backup feature of ["Nokia PC Suite" or "Nokia Nseries PC Suite; insert the applicable one, and delete brackets]. Othe r transfer methods may not tra n sfer the activation keys wh ich need to be restored with the content for you to be able to con tinue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device me mory is formatted. You may also need to restore the acti vation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM pr otected content, both the activation keys a nd the content will be lost if th e device 108 Security and data m anagem ent
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activa tion keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by type, select Valid keys , Invali d keys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Optio ns > Key details . The following details are disp layed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activ ation key is valid , Activa tion key expire d , or Activation key not ye t valid . ⢠Conten t send ing â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allowed means that you cannot send the file to anoth er device. ⢠Content in phone â Yes means that t he file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the relate d file is not currently in the devi ce. To activate a key, go to the A ctivation keys main view, and select Invalid keys > Opt ions > Ge t activation key . Establish a network connecti on at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where you can purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desi red file, and select Option s > Delet e . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all the rights are deleted. The group key view displays a ll of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same ri ghts, th ey are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view from either the valid keys or invalid keys tabs. To access these files, open the group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > T ools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronis e your contacts, calendar entries, notes, or mail boxes with corresponding application s on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Your synchronisation settings are saved in a sy nchron isation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisat ion. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the applications with which you want to synchronise your device. You may receive the synchr onisation settings as a message from your service provider. The available applicati ons you can s ynchronise may va ry. Contact your service provider for more information. 109 Security and data m anagem ent
Create a synchronisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suite synchronisation profile available in your device. You do not need to edit it if you synchronise your device wit h a computer usi ng Nokia PC Suite. To create a new profile, select Option s > New s ync profile and assign a name for the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connection settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the application s to synchronis e with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync pr ofile > Applicatio ns . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote database and Synchronisation type settings. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select New sync profile > Co nnection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server ver sion â Select the Sync ML version you can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only availabl e if you select 1.2 as the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server du ring synchronisation. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the synchronisation connec tion, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains th e database with which you want to synchronise your device. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the remote database server. ⢠User n ame â Ente r your user name to identify your device to the server. ⢠Password â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. ⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote da tabase server, select Yes . ⢠Accept al l sync requests â To have your device as k for your confirmation before accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network authent ication â To au thenticate y our device to the network befo re synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and network password. Download! Select Menu > Download! . 110 Security and data m anagem ent
With Download! (network service), you can browse, download, and install items, such as latest ap plications and related documents, to your device from the web. The items are categorised un der catalogs and folders provided by Nokia or independent service providers. Some items may be charg eable, but you can usually preview them free of charge. Download! uses your network services to access the most updated content. For informa tion on additional items available th rough Download!, cont act your service provider, or the supplier or manufacturer of the item. Only install and use appl ications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection again st harmful software. Select catalogs, folders, and items To update the Download! cont ent, select Opt ions > Refresh li st . To hide a folder or a catalog from the list, f or example, to view only items that you use frequently, select Option s > Hide . To make the items visible again, select Option s > Show all . To buy the selected item, select Option s > Buy . A submenu opens, where you can select the version of the item and view price information. To download an item that is free of charge, select Option s > Get . To view the details of the selected item, select Option s > View details . To return to the Download! main level, select Option s > Homepage . The available options may vary depending on your service provider, the select ed item, and the view you are in. Download! settings To change the Dow n load! settings, select Option s > Settings and from the following: ⢠Access point â Select an acce ss poin t to use to connect to the service provider 's server. ⢠Automati c open â Select whether you want the downloaded item or application to open automatically after the dow nload is completed. ⢠Preview c onfirmation â Select wheth er you want a confirmation query to be shown before previewing an item. ⢠Buy c onfir mation â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before buying an item. Software updates Nokia may produce soft ware updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You ma y be able to request these updates through the N okia Software Updater PC application. To upda te the device software, you need the Nokia Software Update r application an d a 111 Security and data m anagem ent
compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system , broadband internet a ccess, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and t o download the Nokia Software Updater applic ation, visit www .nokia- asia.com/softwareupdate or your local Nokia website. Tip: To check the softwa re version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mo de. 112 Security and data m anagem ent
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these se ttings affects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change su ch settings. Select the setting you wan t to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two va lues , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Ge neral . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display settings and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Enhancemen t â Define the se ttings for you r enhancements. ⢠Security â Defin e the security settings. ⢠Factory se ttings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positi oning â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based app lications. Personalisation settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Personalisati on . Display settings To define the level of ligh t that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver ti me-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome not e / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an image. To set how quickly the displa y dims after the last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . 113 Settings
Standby mode settings To select whether to use the acti ve standby, select Standby mo de > Activ e standby . To assign shortcuts for the scroll key and selection ke ys, select Standby mode > Shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the active sta ndby. To assign shortcuts to applications, select Standby mode > Standby apps . To select whether to show or hide the operator logo, select Standby mode > Operator logo > On or Off . To select the Inbox or the mailbox that is shown in the active standby, select Standby mode > Active standby ma ilbox . To select the plug-ins that are show n in the active standby, select Standby mode > Active standby plug-ins . You can, for example, see how many voice mails you have. Th e available plug- ins may vary. Tone s etting s To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ringing type, s elect To nes > Ringing type . You can also set the device to sound a ring ing tone that is a combination of the spoken name of the caller and the selected ri nging tone, when someone from yo ur contac ts li st calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the various alert tones, select Tones > Message alert tone , E-ma il alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you r eceive a call, select Tones > Vibrating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Keypad to nes . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . Language settings To set th e language u sed on the devi ce display, select Language > Phone language . To select the language in which you write notes and messages, sele ct Language > Writing language . To select whether to use the predictive text input, select Lang uage > Predi ctive text . Notification light You can s et the noti fication lig ht on the cover o f your device to bli nk when y ou have r eceived a new mess age or when you have missed a phone call. To set the length of tim e you want the notificat ion light to blink, select Notificat ion light > Blink light for . To select of which events yo u want t o be notified, select Notifi cation l ight > N otified events . 114 Settings
Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Genera l > Dat e and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Ti me zone . To update the time, date, and time zone information automat ically (netwo rk servic e), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To select whether to use th e 12-hour or 24-hour clock system and w ith which symbol to se parate hours and minutes, s elect Time format and Time se parator . To determine th e date fo rmat and separator, select Date format and Date se parator . To define the clock typ e, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, select Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Ge neral > Enhancemen t . Common enhancement settings With most enhanc ements, you c an do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select Default profile . To let the device answer ph one calls automatically after 5 seconds when a n enhanc ement is attached, select Automati c answer > On . If the ringing type i s set to Beep once or Silent in the selected profile, the automati c answer i s disabled. To illuminate the devi ce while it is attached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . Security settings Select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following se curity settings: ⢠Phone and SIM c ard â Adjus t the security settings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate manage ment â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security mo dule â Manage your security module. Avoid using codes that are similar to emergency numbers to prevent accide ntal dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you change a code, enter the curren t code, then the new co de twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code must be 4 to 8 digits long. The PIN code protects your SIM card ag ainst unauthorised use and is provided with the SIM card. After three 115 Settings
consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can use the S IM card again. To set the keypad to lock au tomatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad auto lock p eriod . To set a time-out af ter which the device is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time- out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls ma y still be possi ble to the official emergency number programmed into your devi ce. To set a new lock code, select Phone and SIM card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and bo th uppercase and lowerca se alphabets are possible. The device n otifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. To set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown, new SIM card is inserted into your device, select Phone an d SIM card > Lock if SIM card changed . The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the owners cards. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may ta ke a longer time to power on. Documents, con tact information, calendar entries, and file s are unaffected. Teleph one settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert," p. 37 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barrin g settings. See "Call barring," p. 38 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings . Call settings To display your phone num ber to the person you are calling, select Call > Se nd my caller ID > Yes . To let the network determine whethe r your caller ID is sent, select Set by ne twork . To display your net call address to th e person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be noti fied of a new incoming call wh ile you hav e a call in progre ss, select Cal l > Call waiting > Optio ns > Activ ate . To check if the function is active on the n etwork, select Options > Check s t atus . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet call a lert . You are no tified of missed net calls with a notification. 116 Settings
To set the default call type, s elect Call > Default call type and select Voice call if you make a GSM calls, or Internet call if you make net calls. To send a text message a u tomatically to the pers on who is calling you informing why you cannot answer the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Yes . To set the text for the message, select Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Pho ne > Network . To select the network mode, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automa tically between net works. To select the operator, select Operator se lectio n and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automati c to have the device select the network automa tically. To set the device to indica te when it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Co nnection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluet ooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See " Sen d and receive data with Bluetooth," p. 93 . ⢠USB â Edit the data c able settings. See "Data cabl e," p. 91 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you ma y not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine wh en packet data connections are used, and enter the acc ess point if you use your device as a modem for a comp uter. ⢠Wireless LAN â Determine if th e device displays an indicator when a WLAN is ava ilable, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠SIP sett ings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Internet tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configurat ions â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data connections. See "Restrict packet data," p. 12 2 . Access points Select Menu > T ools > Settings > Conne ction > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a data connecti on to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your s ervice p rovid er, and you may no t be able to create, edit, or remove them. 117 Settings
To create a new access point, select Options > New access poin t or select an existing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a ba sis for the new one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet da ta . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS networ ks, it i s possible to have multiple data connections a ctive at the same time; access poin ts can sh are a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connecti on manager," p. 100 . To define the packet da ta settings, select Packet data connection an d select When available to register the device to the packet dat a network when you switch the device on in a supported network, or When ne eded to establish a packet data connection only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name p rovided by your service provider to use the device as a pack et data modem to your comp uter. These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displayed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WL ANs and up date the indica tor, select Scan for networks . This s etting is not available unless you select Show WLAN avai lability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are normally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settin gs manually, select Au tomatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long retry limit â Enter the maximum nu mber of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgement signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limit â Enter the maximum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access point device issues a reques t to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. ⢠Radio measurem ents â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power sa ving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to sa ve the power in the device battery. Using the power savin g mechanism 118 Settings
enhances the battery performanc e but may weaken WLAN inter operability. To restore all settings to their original values, select Option s > Restore defaults . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Co nnection > Access points > Optio ns > New access point , o r select an access p oint and Opti ons > Edit . In the access point settings, se lect WLAN securi ty mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privac y (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmitted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not h ave the required WEP keys. When th e WEP security mode is in use, and your device rece ives a data packet not encrypted with the WEP keys , the data is discarded. In an ad-hoc network, all devices must use the same WEP ke y. Select WLAN s ecurity se ttings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authenticati on type â Select Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settin gs â Edit th e settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-h oc network, a ll devices must use the same WEP ke y. Select WLAN se curity setting s > WEP key se ttin gs and from the following: ⢠WEP encr yption â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want to enter the WEP key data in ASCI I or Hexadecimal format. ⢠WEP key â Enter th e WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x authenticates and authorises devices to access a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN s ecurity se ttings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WP A2 â Select EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settin gs â If you select ed WPA/ WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared ke y â If you selected WPA /WPA2 > Pre-shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connec t. 119 Settings
WPA security settings Select WPA/WP A2 as the WLAN security mode. Select WLAN security setting s and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sele ct EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in sett ings â If you select WPA / WPA2 > EAP , select which E AP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shar ed key â If you selec t WPA/WPA2 > Pre-shar ed key , enter the shared private key that identifies y our device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authentication protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wi reless devices and authentica tion servers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible th e use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP plug-i ns currently installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settin gs, select Opt ions > New access point and define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Sel ect 802.1 x or WPA/WPA2 as the se curity mode. 3. Sel ect WLAN security settings > WPA/WPA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in settings . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-in w hen you connect to a WLAN using the access point , select the desired plug-i n and Optio ns > Enable . The EAP p lug-ins enabled for us e with this a ccess point hav e a check ma rk next to them. To not use a plug-in, select Options > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Optio ns > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug -in sett ings, s elect Optio ns > Raise priorit y to attempt to us e the plug- in before other plug -ins when co nnecting to the network with the a ccess point, or Op tions > Lower priority to use this plug-i n for network authenti cation after attempting to use other plug-ins. See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connec tion > SIP settings . 120 Settings
Session initiation protocols (SIP) are used for creating, modifying, and termin ating certain typ es of communication sess ions with one or more participants (network servi ce). Typical communication se ssions are video sharing an d net calls. SI P profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP pr ofile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Options > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use ex isting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Options > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Options > Edit , and select f rom the following: ⢠Profi le name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access point â Select the access point to use for the internet connecti on. ⢠Public user name â Enter you r user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use co mpression â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registratio n â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use s ecuri ty â Select if security negoti ation is used. ⢠Proxy s erver â Enter th e proxy server settings for this SIP profi le. ⢠Registrar server â Enter the registration server settings for thi s SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Option s > New SIP profi le or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermediate servers between a browsing service and its u sers used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy s erver address â Enter the host name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User n ame and Password â Enter y our user name and password for the proxy server. ⢠Allow lo ose rout ing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. Edit registration servers Select Option s > New S IP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar serv er addres s â Enter the host name or IP address of the re gistrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User n ame and Password â Enter y our user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. 121 Settings
Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net ca ll profile, select Options > New profile . To edit an existing profile, select Optio ns > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information mana gement containin g configuration setti ngs for trusted servers. These settings are automa tically saved in Configurations . You may receive configurat ion settings fo r access points, multimedia, or e-mail services, and IM or synchronisation settings from trusted ser vers. To delete configurations for a trusted s erver, select Optio ns > Delet e . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted . Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. You r SIM card may not su pport the access point control service. Contact your service provider for more information. To restrict the packet da ta connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to activ ate and deactivate a ccess point control or to edit the packet data access points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided access p oint, create an emp ty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Options > Remove . Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applicatio ns . Select an application from the list to adjust its settings . 122 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts ca n make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Active standb y mode Left selection key * Lock and unlock t he keypad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to op en your home page in the Web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles . 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. Y ou mus t first activ ate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image view er Call key Send the image. 0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 123 Shortcuts
7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen siz e. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise . 1 Rotate count erclockwise. * Switch between th e full screen size and normal view . 124 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communication s. A digital syst em for mobile comm unicat ions wh ich aim s at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode w here two or more devices co nnect to ea ch other using WLAN directly withou t a WLAN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the s erver to you, to store information about y our visits to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that transl ates domain na mes such as ww w.nokia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100. 124.195. Domain names are easier t o remember but this trans lation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual Tone M ulti-Frequency tones . The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. D TMF assign s a specific frequency , or tone, to each key s o that it can easily be identified by a microprocess or. DTMF t ones allow y ou to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerise d telephony sy stems, and so on. EAP Extensible authenti cation protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authen tication servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is simi lar to GPRS, but it enables faster connection. For more information on the availability of EGPRS and data transfer speed, contact your ser vice provider. 125 Glossary
GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where in formation is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. A s GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fa st data transmission sp eeds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and subscription to GPRS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, you cannot establish a GPRS connection , and any existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network s upports dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings hig h-s peed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavai lable because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertex t transfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used fo r accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructur e operating mode A WLAN network mode w here devices are connected to WLAN using a WLAN access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the cod e is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 t o 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain fu nctions suppo rted by the SIM card. The le ng th of the PI N2 code is 4 to 8 digits. 126 Glossary
POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 PIN Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session initiation pr otocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them directly from th e web without dow n loading them first to your device. UMTS Universal mobile telecommunications system. UMTS is a 3G mobile communication system. Besides voice and data, UMT S enables audio an d video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GS M and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active a t the same time, and ac cess points can sh are a data connection. In the UMTS net work, data connections remain active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previously possible while simultaneously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPI N code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM car d used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, that you can send to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over internet protocol technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phon e calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual p rivate network. VPN creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and serv ices, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communi cation. WEP Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an encryption method that encrypts da ta before it is transmitted in WLA N. WLAN Wireless local area network. 127 Glossary
WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 128 Glossary
Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any app roval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive range of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements fo r more details. For availability of the enhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rules about accessories an d enhancements ⢠Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reach of small children. ⢠When you disconnect th e power cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp an d pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that enhanc ements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating properly. ⢠Installati on of any comp lex car enhancements must be made by qualif ied personnel only. Battery Important: Battery talk a nd standby times are es timates only and dep end on signal strength, n etwork conditions, features used, battery age an d condition, temperatures to which battery is expo sed, use in digital mode, and many othe r factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its standby ti me. Likewise, the amount of ti me that the device is turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk ti me. 129 Nokia or iginal enhan cements Type Talk time Standby BP-6MT Up to min Up to 3 h 0 6 1 3 d a y s
Troubleshooting To see frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit the product support pages at the Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12 345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If yo u forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an ap plication that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press th e backspace key to close the application. Q: Why do imag es look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloure d, or bright dots appear on the screen ev ery time I switch o n my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may cont ain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I find m y friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth conne ctivity? A: Check that both devi ces are co mpatible , have activated Bluetooth con nectivity, and are not in t he hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) a nd that there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the devic es. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bl uetooth conne ction? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating B luetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connecti vity > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a WLAN access point even though I know I'm with in its range? A: Check that the Offline pr ofile is not in use in your devi ce. The WLAN access p oint may use a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly a ccess networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access p oint for the network on your Nokia device Check that the WLAN access point is n ot on channels 12-13, as they cannot be as sociated with. 130 Troubleshootin g
Q: How do I switch WLAN off on my Nokia dev ice? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to conne ct, not connected to another access point, or n ot scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your Nokia device does not scan, or s cans les s often, for available networks in the backgr ound. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To stop the back ground sc ans, select Menu > Tools > Settin gs > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN n etworks and connect to WLA N networks as us ual. To increase the background scan inte rval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interval in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I b rowse the web ev en though the WLAN connection is working and the IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have defin ed the HTTP/ HTTPS proxy settings correctly in the adva nced settings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal quality of my WLA N connection? Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Conn. mgr. > Active data connect ions > Optio ns > Detail s . If the signal quality is weak or mode rate, you may encounter connection problems. Try ag ain closer to the access point. Q: Why do I hav e problems w ith the s ecurity mode? A: Check that you have config ured the security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the secu rity mode the network uses, select Menu > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Optio ns > Details . Check also the following: you ha ve the correct WPA mode (preshared key or E AP) , you have disabled all EA P types that are not needed, and all the EAP type sett ings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I se lect a con tact for my message ? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e- mail address. Select Menu > Contacts , and edit the contact ca rd. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happen ing? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia messaging centre. This note is shown if you ha ve set Multimedia ret rieval to Always automatic in the multimedia message settings. Check th at the settings for multimedia messaging ar e defined correct ly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedia message settings," p. 61 . Q: How ca n I end the data c onnecti on when the device starts a data connection again and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedi a message from the multimedia message centre. To stop the device from making a data connection, select Menu > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Mult imedia re trieval > Manual to have the multimedia messaging cen t re save 131 Troubleshootin g A:
messages to be retrieved later, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia messa ge that you can retrieve in the multimedia me ssage centre. If you select Off , the device does not make any network connections related to multimedia messag ing. To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Packet data > Packet dat a connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems con necting th e device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have t he latest version of Nokia PC Suite and that it is inst alled and running on y o ur compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support p ages of the Nokia web site. Q: How do I save batte ry power? A: Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background scans for WLAN. Se lect Menu > Tools > Sett ings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Show WLAN availab ility > Never . You can still manually scan for av ailable W LAN networks and connect to WLAN networks as usua l. ⢠Set the device to u se a pa cket data connection only if you start an appl ication or action th at needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet dat a > Packet data connecti on > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > Tools > Maps > Option s > Se ttin gs > Network > Use n etwork > Off . ⢠Change the time-out after wh ich the backlight is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the appl ication, and press the backspace key to close the application. 132 Troubleshootin g
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged an d discharg ed hundreds of times, but it will eventu ally wear out. When the talk and standby times a r e noticeably shorte r than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia appro ved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this dev ice. If a replacement batt ery is being used for the firs t time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be neces sary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charg ing the battery. Unplug the charg er from the electrical plug an d the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely dis charged, it ma y take several minutes before the chargi ng indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circui t the b attery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) a n d negative (-) termin als of the batt ery. (These look like metal strips o n the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circuit ing the terminals may damage the battery or th e connecting object. Leaving the ba ttery in hot or cold places, su ch as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of th e battery. Alwa ys try to keep the battery between 15 ðC and 25 ðC (59ðF and 77ð F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when th e battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as the y may explode. Batteries may al so explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to com e in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or ey es immediately with wa ter, or seek medical help. 133 Battery information
Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia ba tteries for your safe ty. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your batt ery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest a uthorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticit y. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the p lace of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Origina l Enhancem ents log o when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm th at your Nokia batt ery with the hologram on t he label is an aut hentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Ta ke it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not a pproved by the manufacturer may be da ngerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate a n y approval or warranty applying to the device. To find out more about orig inal Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery . 134 Battery information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove th e battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dus ty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and elec tronic componen ts ca n be damaged . ⢠Do not store the device in hot area s. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the devi ce and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than a s instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. R ough handling can brea k internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint th e device. Paint can clog th e moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor , an d light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Una uthorized antennas, modifications , or attachments could da mage the device and may violate regulations go verning radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the batte ry. These suggestions appl y eq ually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to th e nearest authorized service facility for service. 135 Care a nd maintenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of th e reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ea r or when positioned at least 2. 2 centimeters (7/8 inches) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal an d should position the dev ice the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or mess ages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. En sure the above separation di stance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are ma gnetic. M etallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not plac e credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones , may in terfere w ith th e functionality of inadequa tely protected medical devices. Consult a physician or th e manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regu lati ons posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or h ealth care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of med ical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and an implanted medical device , such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices s hould: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. 136 Additional safety information
⢠Not carry the wireless devi ce in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opp osite the medical device to minimize the potenti a l for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medica l device. If you have any questions a bout using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere wi th some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elec tronic systems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air b ag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may ap ply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment a s the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, r e m e m b e r t h a t a i r b a g s i n f l a t e w i t h g r e a t f o r c e . D o n o t place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-veh icle wireless equipment is improperly installed and th e air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevice s in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosiv e atmosph ere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentia lly explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near g as pumps at ser vice stations . Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blastin g operations are in progress. 137 Additional safety information
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosp here are often, but not always, clea rly marked. They include below deck on boat s, chemical tran sfer or storage facilities and areas where th e air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or met al powders. You should check with the manufa ct urers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propan e or butane) to determine if this device ca n be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio si gnals, wireless networks , landline networks, and u ser-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You sh ould ne ver rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on , switch it on. Check for adequate signal st rength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emer gency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call ke y. If certain features are in use, you may first need t o turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the phone function before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commun ication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobi le devic e meets guidel ines for exp osure to radio wa ves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organi zation ICNIRP and include safety margins designe d to as sure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measuremen t known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guid elin es is 2.0 wa tts/ kilo gram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR a re conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all 138 Additional safety information
tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the m aximum va lue because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the netw ork. That amount chang es depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base sta t ion. The hi ghest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidel ines for use of the device at the ear is 1.40 W/kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements an d the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia-asia.c om. 139 Additional safety information
MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statut ory) rights under your applicable nation al laws relating to the sale of consu mer prod ucts. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in th e sales package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrant s to you th at during the warranty period Nokia or a Nokia authorized service company will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in materials, desig n and workmanship free of charge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacin g the Product in accordance with this Limited Warranty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Warranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purcha sed the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty period The warranty period starts at the time of Product's original purchase by the first end-user. The Produc t may consist of several different parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different Warranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months fo r the mobile device and accessories (whether included in the mobile device sales package or sold se p arately) other than the consuma ble parts and ac cessor ies listed in (b) and (c) below ; b) six (6) months for the following consumable parts and accessories: batter ies, chargers, de sk stands, headsets , cables and covers ; and c ) n i n e t y ( 9 0 ) d a y s f o r t h e m e d i a o n w h i c h a n y s o f t w a r e is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subseq uent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the date of repa ir, wh ichev er is long er. 140 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
How to get warranty service If you wish to make a claim u nder the Limited Warranty, you may call the No kia call center (w here this is available and please note national rates a pply to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product o r the affected part (if it is not the en tire Product ) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location. Information about Nokia care centers, N okia designated service locations and Nokia call centers can be found at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care center or Nokia designated service location before the expiry of the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warranty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or a ffected part thereto), b) the legible and unmodified original proof of purchase, which clearly indicates th e name and address of the seller, the date and pla ce of purchase, the produ ct type and the IMEI or other serial number. This Limited Warranty extends only to the original first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subseq uen t purchaser/end-user. What is not covered? 1. This Limited Warranty do es not cover user manuals or any third party software, settings, content, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, a ssembly, shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination wi th any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in the software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Limited Warranty does not cover a) normal wear and tear (includin g, without limitation, w ear and tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by roug h handling (including, without lim itation, defects caused b y sharp item s, by bending, compressing or dropping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misus e of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the Prod uct's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 3. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by th e fact that the Product wa s used with, or connected to, a product, accessories, software and/or se rvice not manufactured, supplied or authorized by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third part y's unauthorised a ccess to services, other accounts , computer systems or networks. This unauthoris ed access can take place through hacking, passw ord-mining or through a variety of other means. 4. This Limited Warranty does not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery has been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the ba ttery enclosure or the 141 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery ha s been used in equipment other than those for wh ic h it has been specified. 5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an authorized service centre, if it is repaired using unauthorised spare part s or if the ProductâÂÂs seri al number, the mobile accessory date code or the IMEI number has been removed, er ased, defaced, altered or are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to moisture, to da mpness or to extreme thermal or environmental conditions or to rapid changes in such co nditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chemical produc ts. Other important notices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellular and/or ot her network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility un der this warranty for the operation, availa bility, cove rage, services or range of the cellular or other network or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may ha ve been added to lock the product to a specific network or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or f or the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make backup copies or keep written records of all import ant content and da ta stored in your Product, be cause content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manne r consiste nt with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLimit ation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by a pplicable law(s), shall not under any circumstan ces be liable, either expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting fr om loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacement of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment t hat Nokia has replace d shall become the prop erty of Nokia. If the returned P roduct is fo und not to be covered by the terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia and its authorized service companies reserve the right to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or recond itioned. Your Product may c ontain country specific elements, including software. If the Pr oduct has been re- exported from its original destination country to another country, the Product may contain country specific elements that are not consid ered to be a defect under this Limited Warrant y. 142 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Nokia and Nokia's sole and exclus ive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However, this Limit ed Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (s tatutory) rights under the appli c able national laws or ii) any of your rig hts aga inst th e seller of the Product. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, whether oral, written, (non- mandatory) st atutory, co ntract ual, in tort or otherwise, including, without limitat ion, and where permitted by applicable law, any implie d conditions, w arranties or other terms as to satisfacto ry quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent perm itted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products or functionality, loss of busine ss, loss of contracts, loss of reve nues or loss of anticipated savings, in creased costs or expenses or for any indirect loss or damage, conseque ntial loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permitted by applicable law, NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Produ ct. The above li mitations shall not ap ply to deat h or personal injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. Statutory obligations This Limit ed Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions th at imply warranties or conditions into this Li mited Warra nty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited ex tent. If such statutory provisions apply, t o the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to , in the case of goods: the replacement of the goods or the supply of equivalent goods, the repair of the g oods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of service s: the supplying of the services again or the pa yment of the cost of having the services supplied again. Note: Your Produ ct is a sophi sticated electronic device. Nokia stron gly encourages you to familiarise yourself with the user guide and instructions provided with and for the Product. Please also n ote that the Product might con tain high precision displays, camera lenses and other su ch parts, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if no t handled very carefully. All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without notice. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02150 Espoo Finland 143 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARR ANTY
Index Symbols/Numerics 3-D ringing tones 26 802.1x security setti ngs 1 1 9 A access points creating 117 activation keys 108 Active note s 6 4 settings 64 activ e stan dby 21 alarm clock 70 alert to nes 114 altitude calibration 88 animated screen s aver 25 antennas 31 application s ettings 122 applicatio ns common actions 22 installing 107 modifying installations 107 shortcuts 114 attachments e-mail 53 multimedia messa ges 58 sound clips 59 audio files detai ls 75 sending 75 audio them es 26 autolock period 11 5 B background image 25 backing up data 105 battery charge level 17 charging 14 inserting 13 blogs 49 Bluetooth authorising devices 94 pairing 94 passcode 94 receiving data 93 security 95 sending data 93 bookmarks 49 browsi ng offline 49 web 48 business cards 44 sending 4 4 C cable 91 cache emptying 49 Calculator 65 Calendar adding received entries 45 creating entries 45 day view 47 deleting entries 45 month view 47 sending entries 45 settings 47 to-do view 47 week view 47 calendar key 28 call barring 38 net calls 38 call divert 37 caller ID 1 16 calls answering 33 barring net calls 38 call waiting 116 caller ID 116 conference call 34 fax calls 34 fixed dialling 44, 103 making 33 making a call from Log 42 making a net ca ll 37 muting the ringing tone 33 net call alert 116 PTT 82 rejecting 33 144 Index
rejecting wi th text message 116 selecting ty pe 11 6 settings 116 speed dialling 37 voice commands 40 voice dialling 40 voic e mail 39 camera capturing images 72 recording video clips 72 settings 73 car kit remote SIM access 95 cell broadcast 60 settings 63 certificates details 104 settings 104 charging the battery 14 Clock alarms 70 settings 70 world cloc k 70 conference calls 34 configuration messages 122 connection methods Bluetooth 93 data cable 91 infrared 92 modem 100 connections ending 100 GPRS settings 98 WLAN settin gs 99 connectors 15 contacts adding thumbnails 4 2 copying information 42 creating 42 groups 43 ringing tones 43 searching 42 SIM card contac ts 42 SIM directory 44 voice tags 42 contacts key 2 7 converting currencies 68 measurements 68 currency conversions 68 customer service 19 D date settings 115 destination removing 88 setting 88 Device manager 105 display changing the look 25 indicators 17 settings 113 Download! catalogs 111 settings 111 DTMF tones 39 E e-mail automatic retrieval settings 63 connecting to mailbox 5 3 connection sett ings 62 creating folders 54 deleting 54 replying 53 retrieval settings 6 2 sending 54 setting up 52 user settings 62 writing 54 e-mail key 28 EAP plug-in settings 120 using an EAP plug-in 120 ending internet connections 49 network connections 100 enhancement s remote SIM access 95 settings 115 equaliser 76 F fax calls 34 feeds 49 File manager 66 files downloading 73 flash files 80 sending 66 145 Index
fixed dialli ng 44, 103 free memo ry 28 G Gallery 73 Genuin e enhanceme nts 129 GPRS access point settings 98 advanced access point settings 98 settings 118 H heads et connecti ng 16 home k ey 27 HSDPA (high-speed downlin k packet access) 91 I IM application se ttings 79 blocking users 79 groups 78 settings 78 starting a convers ation 7 8 images adding to conta cts 74 displa y backgrou nd 74 rotating 73 sending 74 zooming 73 indicators 17 infrared 92 insert ing battery 13 memory card 29 SIM card 13 installation log 107 installin g applications 107 intern et 48 ending connections 49 internet calls 3 7 J jad files 107 jar files 107 Java applications 107 K key store 1 05 keyguard 17 keypad lock settings 115 locking 17 tones 114 keys 15 activation keys 108 shortcuts 114 WEP keys 119 L landmarks categories 89 creating 89 editing 89 receiving 9 0 sending 90 lang uage changing 31 settings 114 lock code 102, 115 locking device 10 2 device autolock 115 keypad 17, 115 Log 4 1 adding numbers to Contacts 41 deleting 41 making a call 42 sending mess ages 42 settings 42 transfer log 24 logos operator logo 114 welcome logo 113 M mailboxe s connecting 53 creating 52 maintenance services 19 making a call 33 measureme nts converting 68 measuring syst em changing 88 memory 28 memory card backing up data 105 formatting 29 146 Index
inserting 29 locking 102 microSD 29 passwords 102 setting passw ord 29, 66 unlocking 29 menu 2 2 message reader 51 selecting voice 51 messages 50 call rejection messages 116 cell broadcast settings 63 configuration messa ges 122 other settings 63 sending sound clips 59 service messages 59 text message se ttings 60 Messaging folders 50, 51 microSD 29 modem 1 00 multimedi a messages attachments 58 creating 56 creating presentations 57 forwarding 58 receiving 5 7 replying to 57 sending 5 6 sending options 59 settings 61 multitasking 28 Music player listening to music 75 music categori es 76 track lists 76 N net calls 37 alert sett ings 116 barring 38 connecting 36 making a call 37 profiles 36, 122 settings 122 network settings 117 Nokia Maps 85 Nokia PC Suite 91 Nokia support and contact information 19 Nokia Team Suite 67 action bar settings 67 editing teams 67 settings 67 Notes 71 notification light 114 O operator logo 114 selecting 117 original sett ings 116 P packet data access point setting s 98 advanc ed access point settings 98 restricting 122 settings 118 pairing devices 94 passcode 94 passwords memory card password 29, 66 PC Suite 91 PDF reader 69 personalisat ion 25 changing language 114 display 113 standby modes 114 tones 114 picture messages forwarding 56 viewing 55 PIN co de changing 115 playing messages 51 recordings 7 7 video and audio 74 positi oning settings 84 predictiv e text i nput 31, 114 presentat ions 57 printer s ettings 70 printi ng 69 profil es creating 24 customising 24, 25 net call profile 36, 122 selecting ringing tones 25 147 Index
PTT contacts 83 created calls 82 creating a channel 83 exiting 83 logging in 82 making a call 82 settings 82 Q Quickoffice 66 R radio listening to 80 saved stations 81 settings 81 viewing visual content 81 RealPlayer playing media clips 74 sending files 7 5 settings 75 viewing clip details 75 recorder playing recordings 77 recording a sound clip 7 7 settings 77 recording sound clips 77 video clips 72 remote configuratio n 10 5 remote lock 102 remote synchron isation 110 repair services 19 restoring or iginal settings 116 ringing tones 43, 114 3-D 26 in profiles 25 vibrating aler t 1 14 S satellite signal strength 88 saving current position 88 files 22 settings 22 screen saver 25, 113 Search application 65 search resu lts 6 5 searching available WLANs 100 contacts 42 security Bluetooth 95 device and SIM card 115 Java app lication 107 memory card 102 security modul e 1 05 sending files 22, 66 using Bluetooth 93 videos 35 service command s 59 service mes sages 59 settings 63 session initiat ion protocol See SIP settings Active notes 64 advanced WLAN 118 application installations 107 applications 122 Calendar 47 calls 116 camera 73 cell broadcast 63 certificate 104 clock 70 date 115 display 113 Download! application 111 e-mail connection 62 e-mail retrieval 63 e-mail user 62 EAP plug-ins 120 enhancements 115 GPRS 98, 118 IM 78 Java applicat ion security 107 keypad lock 115 language 114 Log 42 multimedia messages 61 net call 122 network 117 Nokia Team Suit e 67 packet data 118 positioning 84 printer 70 PTT 82 radio 81 RealPlayer 75 recorder 77 restoring 116 148 Index
service messages 63 SIP 120 standby mode 114 text messages 60 time 115 tones 114 voice commands 41 Web 49 WEP security 119 WLAN 118 WLAN access point 9 9 WLAN security 119 Settin gs wiza rd 20 shortcuts 123 applications 114 keys 114 signal streng th 17 SIM access profile 95 SIM card inserting 13 text messages 55 SIM change lock 115 SIM directory 44 SIP creating profiles 120 editing profiles 121 editing proxy servers 121 editing registration servers 121 settings 120 sis files 107 sisx files 107 software packages installation settings 107 installing 107 softw are update 111 sound clips recording 77 sending 59 Speech 51 speed dialling 37 standby modes active sta ndby 21 basic standby mode 21 settings 114 support inf ormation 19 switching device on and off 16 Symbian appl ications 107 synchronisation 24 settings 110 synchronisation profiles 110 synchronising applications 110 T tabs 22 text changing size 113 letter mode 30 number mode 30 predictive input 31 traditional input 30 text mes sages messages on SIM card 55 sending 54 sending options 55 settings 60 writing 54 themes audio 26 changing 25 downloading 26 time settings 115 to-do entr ies 46 tones 114 settings 114 track lists 76 tradition al text inpu t 30 Transfer log 2 4 transferrin g data 23 trip destinat ion 88 trip met er 88 troublesh ooting 130 U UPIN co de changing 115 USB da ta cable 91 V vibrating aler t 114 video ca lls making a call 34 switching to voice call 34 video clip s 72 details 75 playing 74 sending 75 video sh aring 35 receiving invitations 35 Voice aid 39 149 Index
voice commands changin g profiles 41 launching an application 40 settings 41 voice mail calling 39 changin g number 39 voice o ver IP 37 VoIP 37 volume 27 W wallpaper 74 warning tones 114 Web connection security 48 settings 49 weblogs 49 Welcome application 20 welcome note 113 WEP keys 119 security setti ngs 119 WLAN 802.1x security settings 119 access point settings 99 access points 96 advanced access point settings 99 advanced settings 118 availability 96 MAC address 96, 118 searching for networks 100 security setti ngs 119 settings 118 WEP keys 119 WPA security se ttings 120 WLAN wizard 9 6 world cl ock 70 WPA security se ttings 120 writing language 31 Z Zip manager 68 150 Index
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care web suppo rt provides you wit h more info rmation on our on line services. INTERACTIV E DEMONSTRATIONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem o nstrati ons give step-by- step instructions on using your phone. USERâÂÂS GUIDE The online UserâÂÂs Guide contains detailed in formation on your phone. Remembe r to check regularly for updates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone with software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your phone and PC s o you can manage your calendar, contacts, music and images, while other applications complement its use. SETTINGS Certain phone funct ions, such as multimed ia messaging, mobile browsing and email*, may require settings before you can use th em. Ha ve them sent to your phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones. INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATI ONS SOFTWARE USERâÂÂS GUIDE SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps you prepare your phone for use. Fa miliarise yourself wi th phone functions and features b y referring t o the Guides and Demos section at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you synchronise your calendar and contacts. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE? Get more out of your phone with downl o ads from the So ft ware section at www.nokia-asia .com/software . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON Q UESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to your questions on yo ur phone and other Nokia products and services. HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS? Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exclusive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communication s" for upcoming e vents. Should you still require furthe r assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/contactus . For additional informati on on repair services, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own country site for more details: Australia and New Zealand www.nokia.com.au/support Malaysia www.nokia.com.my /support India www.nokia.co.in/support Philippine s www.noki a.com.ph/support Indonesia www.nokia.co.id/support Singapore www.nokia.com.sg/support Japan www.nokia.co.jp/support Th ailand www.nokia.co.th/support If your country is not lis ted above, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support .